3. 第三巴拉基格巴利 3. Tatiyapārājikaṃ
1. 巴拉基格篇义注 · 275 段
佛以三净所阐明之第三巴拉基格,
其注释次第今已至此。
因为先前已曾宣说,所以彼极易可了知;
舍离彼已,此亦成其解释。巴利
Tatiyaṃ tīhi suddhena, yaṃ buddhena vibhāvitaṃ; Pārājikaṃ tassa dāni, patto saṃvaṇṇanākkamo. Yasmā tasmā suviññeyyaṃ, yaṃ pubbe ca pakāsitaṃ; Taṃ vajjayitvā assāpi, hoti saṃvaṇṇanā ayaṃ.
初制因缘注释巴利
Paṭhamapaññattinidānavaṇṇanā
162 那时,佛陀、世尊住在毗舍离城的大林重阁讲堂。这里说的“毗舍离”,是一座以阴性名词形式流传其名的城市。这座城因为三次扩建城墙围篱而变得广阔,所以称为“毗舍离”。也应该知道,这座城是在正自觉者成就一切知智的时候,才在各方面达到极盛的。这样说明了所行境的村落之后,接着说明住处:“在大林的重阁讲堂”。其中,“大林”是指自然生长、不是人工种植、有明确边界的广大森林。而迦毗罗卫城附近的大林,则与雪山连成一片,没有边界,一直延伸到大海。这里的大林不是那样,而是有边界的广大森林,所以叫“大林”。“重阁讲堂”则应该理解为:在依大林而建的僧园中,以一座重阁为主体,用雁翼形屋顶覆盖建造的、具足一切庄严的世尊香室。巴利
162.Tenasamayena buddho bhagavā vesāliyaṃ viharati mahāvane kūṭāgārasālāyanti ettha vesāliyanti evaṃnāmake itthiliṅgavasena pavattavohāre nagare. Tañhi nagaraṃ tikkhattuṃ pākāraparikkhepavaḍḍhanena visālībhūtattā ‘‘vesālī’’ti vuccati. Idampi ca nagaraṃ sabbaññutappatteyeva sammāsambuddhe sabbākārena vepullaṃ pattanti veditabbaṃ. Evaṃ gocaragāmaṃ dassetvā nivāsaṭṭhāna māha – ‘‘mahāvane kūṭāgārasālāya’’nti. Tattha mahāvanaṃ nāma sayaṃjātaṃ aropimaṃ saparicchedaṃ mahantaṃ vanaṃ. Kapilavatthusāmantā pana mahāvanaṃ himavantena saha ekābaddhaṃ aparicchedaṃ hutvā mahāsamuddaṃ āhacca ṭhitaṃ. Idaṃ tādisaṃ na hoti, saparicchedaṃ mahantaṃ vananti mahāvanaṃ. Kūṭāgārasālā pana mahāvanaṃ nissāya kate ārāme kūṭāgāraṃ anto katvā haṃsavaṭṭakacchadanena katā sabbākārasampannā buddhassa bhagavato gandhakuṭi veditabbā.
世尊以种种方式讲说不净:他通过许多理由,开示显示不净相、让人厌离身体的教说。比如:“这个身体里有头发、体毛……乃至……尿。” 这是在说什么呢?比丘们,对这个只有一寻长的身体,就算从各个方面仔细寻找,也看不到任何一点像珍珠、摩尼宝、琉璃、沉香、檀香、番红花、樟脑或香粉那样干净的东西。反过来,看到的只是头发、体毛等种种形态的极度恶臭、令人厌恶、不堪入目的不净物。所以,对它不应该生起欲念和贪染。就连长在头顶上的头发,也是不净的、肮脏的、可厌的。而它们的不净、肮脏、可厌,要从颜色、形状、气味、来源、所在位置这五个方面来理解。体毛等也是这样。这里是简略的说明,详细内容应按照《清净道论》里讲的方法来了解。就这样,世尊对每一个部分,都以五种分类,用种种方式讲说不净。巴利
Anekapariyāyena asubhakathaṃ kathetīti anekehi kāraṇehi asubhākārasandassanappavattaṃ kāyavicchandaniyakathaṃ katheti. Seyyathidaṃ – ‘‘atthi imasmiṃ kāye kesā lomā…pe. … mutta’’nti. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? Bhikkhave, imasmiṃ byāmamatte kaḷevare sabbākārenapi vicinanto na koci kiñci muttaṃ vā maṇiṃ vā veḷuriyaṃ vā agaruṃ vā candanaṃ vā kuṅkumaṃ vā kappūraṃ vā vāsacuṇṇādīni vā aṇumattampi sucibhāvaṃ passati. Atha kho paramaduggandhaṃ jegucchaṃ assirīkadassanaṃ kesalomādinānappakāraṃ asuciṃyeva passati. Tasmā na ettha chando vā rāgo vā karaṇīyo. Yepi hi uttamaṅge sirasmiṃ jātā kesā nāma, tepi asubhā ceva asucino ca paṭikkūlā ca. So ca nesaṃ asubhāsucipaṭikkūlabhāvo vaṇṇatopi saṇṭhānatopi gandhatopi āsayatopi okāsatopīti pañcahi kāraṇehi veditabbo. Evaṃ lomādīnanti. Ayamettha saṅkhepo, vitthāro pana visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 1.182) vuttanayena veditabbo. Iti bhagavā ekamekasmiṃ koṭṭhāse pañcapañcappabhedena anekapariyāyena asubhakathaṃ katheti.
赞叹不净:先从不净纲目入手,依膨胀相等等方式,再通过分别解说加以剖析、描述、称扬,这就是在赞叹不净。赞叹不净修习:对于依靠发等所缘,或膨胀相等所缘,或内外诸所缘,执取不净相之后生起的心,加以修习、增长、充分开展,为了显示这种不净修习的功德利益而赞叹其价值,称颂其功德。例如:比丘们,致力于不净修习的比丘,对于发等所缘,或膨胀相等所缘,能证得初禅——舍弃五支、具备五支、具足三种善、成就十种相。他依止这个名为初禅的心之宝箧,增长观智,证得最上义阿拉汉果。巴利
Asubhāya vaṇṇaṃ bhāsatīti uddhumātakādivasena asubhamātikaṃ nikkhipitvā padabhājanīyena taṃ vibhajanto vaṇṇento saṃvaṇṇento asubhāya vaṇṇaṃ bhāsati. Asubhabhāvanāya vaṇṇaṃ bhāsatīti yā ayaṃ kesādīsu vā uddhumātakādīsu vā ajjhattabahiddhāvatthūsu asubhākāraṃ gahetvā pavattassa cittassa bhāvanā vaḍḍhanā phātikammaṃ, tassā asubhabhāvanāya ānisaṃsaṃ dassento vaṇṇaṃ bhāsati, guṇaṃ parikitteti. Seyyathidaṃ – ‘‘asubhabhāvanābhiyutto, bhikkhave , bhikkhu kesādīsu vā vatthūsu uddhumātakādīsu vā pañcaṅgavippahīnaṃ pañcaṅgasamannāgataṃ tividhakalyāṇaṃ dasalakkhaṇasampannaṃ paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ paṭilabhati. So taṃ paṭhamajjhānasaṅkhātaṃ cittamañjūsaṃ nissāya vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā uttamatthaṃ arahattaṃ pāpuṇātī’’ti.
在这里,初禅有十种相:从障碍中净化心;趋向中等的定相;心投入其中;对清净的心保持舍;对止行保持舍;对专一现前保持舍;以不超越此处所生诸法的意义而赞叹;以诸根同一味的意义、以推动相应精进的意义、以反复修习的意义而赞叹。巴利
Tatrimāni paṭhamassa jhānassa dasa lakkhaṇāni – pāripanthikato cittavisuddhi, majjhimassa samādhinimittassa paṭipatti, tattha cittapakkhandanaṃ, visuddhassa cittassa ajjhupekkhanaṃ, samathappaṭipannassa ajjhupekkhanaṃ, ekattupaṭṭhānassa ajjhupekkhanaṃ, tattha jātānaṃ dhammānaṃ anativattanaṭṭhena sampahaṃsanā, indriyānaṃ ekarasaṭṭhena tadupagavīriyavāhanaṭṭhena āsevanaṭṭhena sampahaṃsanāti.
这里引的圣典文句是:初禅的“始”是什么?“中”是什么?“终”是什么?初禅以行道清净为始,以舍的增广为中,以喜悦为终。初禅以行道清净为始,这个“始”有几种相?这个“始”有三种相:心从初禅的障碍中净化;因为清净,心就趋向中等的寂止相;因为趋向,心就投入其中。心从障碍中净化,因为清净而心趋向中等的寂止相,因为趋向而心投入其中——这就是初禅行道清净的“始”,这个“始”具备这三种相。因此说:初禅于始即善,且具足三相。巴利
Tatrāyaṃ pāḷi – ‘‘paṭhamassa jhānassa ko ādi, kiṃ majjhe, kiṃ pariyosānaṃ? Paṭhamassa jhānassa paṭipadāvisuddhi ādi, upekkhānubrūhanā majjhe, sampahaṃsanā pariyosānaṃ. Paṭhamassa jhānassa paṭipadāvisuddhi ādi, ādissa kati lakkhaṇāni? Ādissa tīṇi lakkhaṇāni – yo tassa paripantho tato cittaṃ visujjhati, visuddhattā cittaṃ majjhimaṃ samathanimittaṃ paṭipajjati, paṭipannattā tattha cittaṃ pakkhandati. Yañca paripanthato cittaṃ visujjhati, yañca visuddhattā cittaṃ majjhimaṃ samathanimittaṃ paṭipajjati, yañca paṭipannattā tattha cittaṃ pakkhandati. Paṭhamassa jhānassa paṭipadāvisuddhi ādi, ādissa imāni tīṇi lakkhaṇāni. Tena vuccati – ‘paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ ādikalyāṇañceva hoti tilakkhaṇasampannañca’.
初禅的舍的修习增广属于中间阶段,这个中间阶段有几种特征?中间阶段有三种特征:对清净的心保持舍,对已进入止修的心保持舍,对以单一性现前的心保持舍。对清净的心保持舍,对已进入止修的心保持舍,对以单一性现前的心保持舍——这就是初禅的舍的修习增广属于中间阶段,这个中间阶段具备这三种特征。因此说:初禅在中间阶段是善的,而且具备三种特征。巴利
‘‘Paṭhamassa jhānassa upekkhānubrūhanā majjhe, majjhassa kati lakkhaṇāni? Majjhassa tīṇi lakkhaṇāni – visuddhaṃ cittaṃ ajjhupekkhati, samathappaṭipannaṃ ajjhupekkhati, ekattupaṭṭhānaṃ ajjhupekkhati. Yañca visuddhaṃ cittaṃ ajjhupekkhati, yañca samathappaṭipannaṃ ajjhupekkhati , yañca ekattupaṭṭhānaṃ ajjhupekkhati. Paṭhamassa jhānassa upekkhānubrūhanā majjhe, majjhassa imāni tīṇi lakkhaṇāni. Tena vuccati – ‘paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ majjhekalyāṇañceva hoti tilakkhaṇasampannañca’.
初禅的欢喜圆满是它的终点,这个终点有几种特征?这个终点有四种特征:对于在那里生起的诸法,以不超越它们的意义为欢喜;以诸根同一味的意义为欢喜;以推动相应精进的意义为欢喜;以反复修习的意义为欢喜。初禅的欢喜圆满是它的终点,这个终点具备这四种特征。因此说:初禅在终点上既是善的,又具备四种特征。如此,达到这三种状态的心,具备三种善,成就十种特征,即具备寻、具备伺、具备喜、具备乐、具备心的决意、具备信、具备精进、具备念、具备定、具备慧。巴利
‘‘Paṭhamassa jhānassa sampahaṃsanā pariyosānaṃ, pariyosānassa kati lakkhaṇāni? Pariyosānassa cattāri lakkhaṇāni – tattha jātānaṃ dhammānaṃ anativattanaṭṭhena sampahaṃsanā, indriyānaṃ ekarasaṭṭhena sampahaṃsanā, tadupagavīriyavāhanaṭṭhena sampahaṃsanā, āsevanaṭṭhena sampahaṃsanā. Paṭhamassa jhānassa sampahaṃsanā pariyosānaṃ, pariyosānassa imāni cattāri lakkhaṇāni . Tena vuccati – ‘paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ pariyosānakalyāṇañceva hoti catulakkhaṇasampannañca. ‘‘Evaṃ tividhattagataṃ cittaṃ tividhakalyāṇakaṃ dasalakkhaṇasampannaṃ vitakkasampannañceva hoti vicārasampannañca pītisampannañca sukhasampannañca cittassa adhiṭṭhānasampannañca saddhāsampannañca vīriyasampannañca satisampannañca samādhisampannañca paññāsampannañcā’’ti (paṭi. ro. 1.158).
一次又一次地说明、赞叹不净等至的功德,就是反复确定“是这样,是这样”,从而不断说明:他赞叹不净等至的功德,讲述它的利益,称扬它的优点。比如:“比丘们,当一位比丘的心长期反复熟悉不净想而安住时,在沉迷于行淫法时,心就会退缩、抗拒、反转,不会向外舒展,只会停留在舍或厌恶之中。比丘们,就像鸡毛或筋腱被扔进火里,会卷缩、抗拒、反转,不会向外舒展;同样地,比丘们,当一位比丘的心长期反复熟悉不净想而安住时,在沉迷于行淫法时,心就会退缩、抗拒、反转,不会向外舒展。”巴利
Ādissa ādissa asubhasamāpattiyā vaṇṇaṃ bhāsatīti ‘‘evampi itthampī’’ti punappunaṃ vavatthānaṃ katvā ādisanto asubhasamāpattiyā vaṇṇaṃ bhāsati, ānisaṃsaṃ katheti, guṇaṃ parikitteti. Seyyathidaṃ – ‘‘asubhasaññāparicitena, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno cetasā bahulaṃ viharato methunadhammasamāpattiyā cittaṃ paṭilīyati paṭikuṭati paṭivaṭṭati, na sampasārīyati, upekkhā vā pāṭikulyatā vā saṇṭhāti. Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, kukkuṭapattaṃ vā nhārudaddulaṃ vā aggimhi pakkhittaṃ paṭilīyati paṭikuṭati paṭivaṭṭati, na sampasārīyati; evameva kho, bhikkhave, asubhasaññāparicitena bhikkhuno cetasā bahulaṃ viharato methunadhammasamāpattiyā cittaṃ paṭilīyati paṭikuṭati paṭivaṭṭati, na sampasārīyatī’’ti (a. ni. 7.49).
比丘们,“我想要独处半个月”的意思是:比丘们,我想在半个月里独自隐居、独住,一个人待着。“除了一个送饭的人以外,谁都不该来见我”是说:除了那位送饭的比丘,其他任何比丘或在家人都不该来见我。所谓送饭的比丘,就是不主动跟人攀谈、只为我把信众家里已经备好的饭食取来送给我的人。巴利
Icchāmahaṃ, bhikkhave, addhamāsaṃ paṭisallīyitunti ahaṃ bhikkhave ekaṃ addhamāsaṃ paṭisallīyituṃ nilīyituṃ ekova hutvā viharituṃ icchāmīti attho. Namhi kenaci upasaṅkamitabbo aññatra ekena piṇḍapātanīhārakenāti yo attanā payuttavācaṃ akatvā mamatthāya saddhesu kulesu paṭiyattaṃ piṇḍapātaṃ nīharitvā mayhaṃ upanāmeti, taṃ piṇḍapātanīhārakaṃ ekaṃ bhikkhuṃ ṭhapetvā namhi aññena kenaci bhikkhunā vā gahaṭṭhena vā upasaṅkamitabboti.
为什么世尊这样说呢?据说在过去,有五百个猎鹿人,用大棍和罗网把森林围起来,兴高采烈地一起一辈子以猎杀鸟兽为生,死后投生到地狱。他们在地狱里受了苦报之后,因为过去所造的某种善业,又投生到人间;由于善的亲依止之力,他们全都在世尊身边出了家、受了达上。他们那些根本不善业中还没有成熟的果报,就在那半个月里,通过自己动手或借他人之手,连续的思给他们制造了断命的机会。世尊看到了这件事。业果这种东西,谁也没法阻挡。那些比丘当中,有凡夫,也有入流者、一来者、不来者和漏尽者。其中漏尽者不再受生,其余圣弟子都已确定趣向,最终归于善趣,但凡夫的趣向则不确定。于是世尊心想:“这些人贪恋自己的身体,害怕死亡,没法净化自己的趣向。来吧,我为他们说不净的教说,让他们断除贪欲。他们听了之后,对身体不再贪恋,净化了趣向,就能投生天界。这样,他们在我座下出家就有了意义。”巴利
Kasmā pana evamāhāti? Atīte kira pañcasatā migaluddakā mahatīhi daṇḍavāgurāhi araññaṃ parikkhipitvā haṭṭhatuṭṭhā ekatoyeva yāvajīvaṃ migapakkhighātakammena jīvikaṃ kappetvā niraye upapannā; te tattha paccitvā pubbe katena kenacideva kusalakammena manussesu upapannā kalyāṇūpanissayavasena sabbepi bhagavato santike pabbajjañca upasampadañca labhiṃsu; tesaṃ tato mūlākusalakammato avipakkavipākā aparāparacetanā tasmiṃ addhamāsabbhantare attūpakkamena ca parūpakkamena ca jīvatupacchedāya okāsamakāsi, taṃ bhagavā addasa. Kammavipāko nāma na sakkā kenaci paṭibāhituṃ. Tesu ca bhikkhūsu puthujjanāpi atthi sotāpannasakadāgāmīanāgāmīkhīṇāsavāpi. Tattha khīṇāsavā appaṭisandhikā, itare ariyasāvakā niyatagatikā sugatiparāyaṇā, puthujjanānaṃ pana gati aniyatā. Atha bhagavā cintesi – ‘‘ime attabhāve chandarāgena maraṇabhayabhītā na sakkhissanti gatiṃ visodhetuṃ, handa nesaṃ chandarāgappahānāya asubhakathaṃ kathemi. Taṃ sutvā attabhāve vigatacchandarāgatāya gativisodhanaṃ katvā sagge paṭisandhiṃ gaṇhissanti. Evaṃ nesaṃ mama santike pabbajjā sātthikā bhavissatī’’ti.
于是,为了帮助他们,他以业处为主题,为他们讲说不净的教法,并不是想赞叹死亡。讲完之后,他心里这样想:“如果比丘们在这半个月里见到我,就会一次又一次地跑来报告:‘今天有一个比丘死了,今天有两个……乃至今天有十个死了。’而这样的业报,无论是我还是别人,都无法阻止。我听到这些又能怎样呢?我何必去听这些没有意义的灾祸和不幸?不如我干脆不与比丘们见面。”因此他这样说:“比丘们,我想独自静修半个月;除了送饭的人以外,任何人都不许来见我。”巴利
Tato tesaṃ anuggahāya asubhakathaṃ kathesi kammaṭṭhānasīsena, no maraṇavaṇṇasaṃvaṇṇanādhippāyena. Kathetvā ca panassa etadahosi – ‘‘sace maṃ imaṃ addhamāsaṃ bhikkhū passissanti, ‘ajja eko bhikkhu mato, ajja dve…pe… ajja dasā’ti āgantvā āgantvā ārocessanti. Ayañca kammavipāko na sakkā mayā vā aññena vā paṭibāhituṃ. Svāhaṃ taṃ sutvāpi kiṃ karissāmi? Kiṃ me anatthakena anayabyasanena sutena? Handāhaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ adassanaṃ upagacchāmī’’ti. Tasmā evamāha – ‘‘icchāmahaṃ, bhikkhave, addhamāsaṃ patisallīyituṃ; namhi kenaci upasaṅkamitabbo aññatra ekena piṇḍapātanīhārakenā’’ti.
另一些人则说:“他这样说,是为了避免别人的讥嫌,然后就去独处了。”据说其他人会诽谤世尊:“这位自称‘一切知者、正法妙轮转者’的人,连自己的弟子互相残杀都阻止不了,还能做成别的什么?”对此,智者会说:“世尊正专心独处,不知道这件事,也没有人来告诉他;如果他知道,一定会阻止。”但这只是他们自己的想法,这里最根本的原因还是前面说的那个。关于“Nāssudhā”这个词,“assudhā”只是用来补足音节的虚词,或者表示强调;意思是:根本没有人来见世尊。巴利
Apare panāhu – ‘‘parūpavādavivajjanatthaṃ evaṃ vatvā paṭisallīno’’ti. Pare kira bhagavantaṃ upavadissanti – ‘‘ayaṃ ‘sabbaññū, ahaṃ saddhammavaracakkavattī’ti paṭijānamāno attanopi sāvake aññamaññaṃ ghātente nivāretuṃ na sakkoti. Kimaññaṃ sakkhissatī’’ti? Tattha paṇḍitā vakkhanti – ‘‘bhagavā paṭisallānamanuyutto nayimaṃ pavattiṃ jānāti, kocissa ārocayitāpi natthi, sace jāneyya addhā nivāreyyā’’ti. Idaṃ pana icchāmattaṃ, paṭhamamevettha kāraṇaṃ. Nāssudhāti ettha ‘‘assudhā’’ti padapūraṇamatte avadhāraṇatthe vā nipāto; neva koci bhagavantaṃ upasaṅkamatīti attho.
因为有许多颜色、形状等原因而发生变化,所以叫“多相变异”;意思是说,被种种相状混杂、混入了种种原因。那是什么呢?就是对不净的修习。他们致力于这种多相变异的不净修习而安住,也就是精勤专注地安住。感到痛苦,是指对自己的身体感到痛苦、难受。感到羞耻,是指觉得丢脸。感到厌恶,是指生起了厌恶心。年轻,是指年少。青年,是指具备青春。性好装饰,是指本性就喜欢打扮。洗过头,是指连头一起洗了。这里用“年轻”这个词,是在显示刚进入青春的状态,因为刚进入青春的众生特别喜好装饰。用“洗过头”来显示从事装饰的时机。因为青年即使做完某件事后身体弄脏了,也不会去装饰;但洗过头之后,他就专门去打扮了。那时,他连蛇尸之类的都不愿看。如果有仇敌把蛇尸、狗尸或人尸用绳子绑在他脖子上,强行挂上去,他就会感到痛苦、羞耻、厌恶;同样,那些比丘对自己的身体感到痛苦、羞耻、厌恶,就像那个人厌离那具尸体一样,想要舍弃自己的身体,便拿起刀自己结束生命。他们也互相结束对方的生命,说:“你来结束我的命,我来结束你的命。”巴利
Anekehi vaṇṇasaṇṭhānādīhi kāraṇehi vokāro assāti anekākāravokāro; anekākāravokiṇṇo anekakāraṇasammissoti vuttaṃ hoti. Ko so? Asubhabhāvanānuyogo, taṃ anekākāravokāraṃ asubhabhāvanānuyogaṃ anuyuttā viharantīti yuttapayuttā viharanti. Aṭṭīyantīti sakena kāyena aṭṭā dukkhitā honti . Harāyantīti lajjanti. Jigucchantīti sañjātajigucchā honti. Daharoti taruṇo. Yuvāti yobbanena samannāgato. Maṇḍanakajātikoti maṇḍanakapakatiko. Sīsaṃnhātoti sīsena saddhiṃ nhāto. Daharo yuvāti cettha daharavacanena paṭhamayobbanabhāvaṃ dasseti. Paṭhamayobbane hi sattā visesena maṇḍanakajātikā honti. Sīsaṃnhātoti iminā maṇḍanānuyogakālaṃ. Yuvāpi hi kiñci kammaṃ katvā saṃkiliṭṭhasarīro na maṇḍanānuyutto hoti; sīsaṃnhāto pana so maṇḍanamevānuyuñjati. Ahikuṇapādīni daṭṭhumpi na icchati. So tasmiṃ khaṇe ahikuṇapena vā kukkurakuṇapena vā manussakuṇapena vā kaṇṭhe āsattena kenacideva paccatthikena ānetvā kaṇṭhe baddhena paṭimukkena yathā aṭṭīyeyya harāyeyya jiguccheyya; evameva te bhikkhū sakena kāyena aṭṭīyantā harāyantā jigucchantā so viya puriso taṃ kuṇapaṃ vigatacchandarāgatāya attano kāyaṃ pariccajitukāmā hutvā satthaṃ ādāya attanāpi attānaṃ jīvitā voropenti. ‘‘Tvaṃ maṃ jīvitā voropehi; ahaṃ ta’’nti evaṃ aññamaññampi jīvitā voropenti.
名叫米迦兰提迦的沙门伪装者:米迦兰提迦是他的名字;沙门伪装者是指穿着沙门衣服的人。据说他只留一个顶髻,把其余头发剃光,穿一件袈裟,另一件搭在肩上,就靠着寺院住,以吃剩饭剩菜过活。人们走到那位米迦兰提迦沙门伪装者跟前,这样说道。萨度这个词是表达请求的助词。我们这个词是目的格复数,意思是说:贤友,请夺走我们的生命吧。在这里,圣者们既没有杀生,也没有教唆别人杀生,也没有随喜杀生。但凡夫们全都做了。沾满鲜血的:就是沾满了血。流向瓦古穆达河:瓦古穆达是世人公认有福德的河。据说他也是怀着我要在那里洗掉那罪业的想法而去的,但靠河水的力量,连一点点罪业也根本消不掉。巴利
Migalaṇḍikampi samaṇakuttakanti migalaṇḍikoti tassa nāmaṃ; samaṇakuttakoti samaṇavesadhārako. So kira sikhāmattaṃ ṭhapetvā sīsaṃ muṇḍetvā ekaṃ kāsāvaṃ nivāsetvā ekaṃ aṃse katvā vihāraṃyeva upanissāya vighāsādabhāvena jīvati. Tampi migalaṇḍikaṃ samaṇakuttakaṃ upasaṅkamitvā evaṃ vadanti. Sādhūti āyācanatthe nipāto. Noti upayogabahuvacanaṃ, sādhu āvuso amhe jīvitā voropehīti vuttaṃ hoti. Ettha ca ariyā neva pāṇātipātaṃ kariṃsu na samādapesuṃ, na samanuññā ahesuṃ. Puthujjanā pana sabbamakaṃsu. Lohitakanti lohitamakkhitaṃ. Yena vaggumudānadīti vaggumatā lokassa puññasammatā nadī. Sopi kira ‘‘taṃ pāpaṃ tattha pavāhessāmī’’ti saññāya gato, nadiyā ānubhāvena appamattakampi pāpaṃ pahīnaṃ nāma natthi.
163 确实生起了追悔。据说,在那些比丘当中,没有任何人做出身体或言语上的异常举动,所有人都在正念正知中,以右侧卧下。当他回忆起这件事时,追悔确实生起了。“生起了懊悔”——这句话是为了确定那追悔本身的性质而说的。那是懊悔性的追悔,不是律藏意义上的追悔。“我确实无所得”等话,是为了展示追悔生起的方式。其中,“我确实无所得”是在悲叹:从今以后,我再也没有所谓的利益和安乐可得了。“我确实没有利益”这句话,则是使这个意思更加坚定。这里的意思是:即使有人会说“你有利益”,那也是错的,我确实没有利益。“我确实恶得”是说:即使凭借善业之力获得了这人身,我确实恶得了这人身。“我确实非善得”这句话,则是使这个意思更加坚定。这里的意思是:即使有人会说“你善得了”,那也是错的,我确实非善得。“造作了非福”是指累积或生起了非福。为什么呢?因为我夺走了比丘们的……乃至……生命。其含义是:我夺走了那些具戒的、以那具戒之德而具足善法、上等法、最胜法的比丘们的生命。巴利
163.Ahudeva kukkuccanti tesu kira bhikkhūsu kenacipi kāyavikāro vā vacīvikāro vā na kato, sabbe satā sampajānā dakkhiṇena passena nipajjiṃsu. Taṃ anussarato tassa kukkuccaṃ ahosiyeva. Ahu vippaṭisāroti tasseva kukkuccassa sabhāvaniyamanatthametaṃ vuttaṃ . Vippaṭisārakukkuccaṃ ahosi, na vinayakukkuccanti. Alābhā vata metiādi kukkuccassa pavattiākāradassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Tattha alābhā vata meti āyatiṃ dāni mama hitasukhalābhā nāma natthīti anutthunāti. ‘‘Na vata me lābhā’’tiiminā pana tamevatthaṃ daḷhaṃ karoti. Ayañhettha adhippāyo – sacepi koci ‘‘lābhā te’’ti vadeyya, taṃ micchā, na vata me lābhāti. Dulladdhaṃ vata meti kusalānubhāvena laddhampi idaṃ manussattaṃ dulladdhaṃ vata me. Na vata me suladdhantiiminā pana tamevatthaṃ daḷhaṃ karoti. Ayañhettha adhippāyo – sacepi koci ‘‘suladdhaṃ te’’ti vadeyya, taṃ micchā; na vata me suladdhanti. Apuññaṃ pasutanti apuññaṃ upacitaṃ janitaṃ vā. Kasmāti ce? Yohaṃ bhikkhū…pe… voropesinti . Tassattho – yo ahaṃ sīlavante tāya eva sīlavantatāya kalyāṇadhamme uttamadhamme seṭṭhadhamme bhikkhū jīvitā voropesinti.
有一位属于魔众的天女,按名字来说并不出名,是一位地居天神,持有邪见,站在魔罗那一边,随顺魔罗。她心里想:“这样一来,他就逃不出魔罗的掌控和魔罗的势力范围了。”于是她佩戴上所有装饰,展示自己的神通力,像在不破裂的水面上和大地上行走一样走来,对那个叫弥伽兰迪迦的假沙门说了这番话。“萨度,萨度”是表示随喜赞叹的感叹词,所以这里用了两遍。“你渡了未渡者”:意思是,对于尚未从轮回中渡脱的人,你用夺走他生命的方式使他渡脱、解脱了。据说这位天女愚蠢无知,她的见解是:“没有死的人,就没有从轮回中解脱;死了的人,就解脱了。”所以她就像拿着解脱轮回的凭证一样,怀着这种见解,促使他去做那件事,才这样说的。那时,那个弥伽兰迪迦假沙门虽然先前已经生起了强烈的懊悔,但看到那位天女的神通力后,就断定:“这位天女既然这样说,那这件事一定就是这样的。”于是便赞叹说“我真是有福报”等等。他一座寺院接一座寺院、一间僧房接一间僧房地走去,这样说道:他走到各处寺院和僧房,打开门进去后,对比丘们这样说:“谁还没有渡脱?我来渡谁?”巴利
Aññatarā mārakāyikāti nāmavasena apākaṭā ekā bhummadevatā micchādiṭṭhikā mārapakkhikā mārassanuvattikā ‘‘evamayaṃ māradheyyaṃ māravisayaṃ nātikkamissatī’’ti cintetvā sabbābharaṇavibhūsitā hutvā attano ānubhāvaṃ dassayamānā abhijjamāne udake pathavītale caṅkamamānā viya āgantvā migalaṇḍikaṃ samaṇakuttakaṃ etadavoca. Sādhu sādhūti sampahaṃsanatthe nipāto; tasmā eva dvivacanaṃ kataṃ. Atiṇṇe tāresīti saṃsārato atiṇṇe iminā jīvitāvoropanena tāresi parimocesīti. Ayaṃ kira etissā devatāya bālāya dummedhāya laddhi ‘‘ye na matā, te saṃsārato na muttā. Ye matā, te muttā’’ti. Tasmā saṃsāramocakamilakkhā viya evaṃladdhikā hutvā tampi tattha niyojentī evamāha. Atha kho migalaṇḍiko samaṇakuttako tāva bhusaṃ uppannavippaṭisāropi taṃ devatāya ānubhāvaṃ disvā ‘‘ayaṃ devatā evamāha – addhā iminā atthena evameva bhavitabba’’nti niṭṭhaṃ gantvā ‘‘lābhā kira me’’tiādīni parikittayanto. Vihārena vihāraṃ pariveṇena pariveṇaṃ upasaṅkamitvā evaṃ vadetīti taṃ taṃ vihārañca pariveṇañca upasaṅkamitvā dvāraṃ vivaritvā anto pavisitvā bhikkhū evaṃ vadati – ‘‘ko atiṇṇo, kaṃ tāremī’’ti?
确实有恐惧:因为想到死亡,心里就生起怖畏。确实有战栗:从心脏、肌肉等开始,身体因此颤动;也有人说,是因为极度恐惧而身体僵硬,因为僵硬就称为战栗。身毛竖立:就是汗毛竖起来。然而诸漏尽者由于善见诸法空无有情,根本看不到有死亡的有情,所以应当知道,他们完全没有这些。他曾一天之内夺走一位比丘、两位比丘……乃至六十位比丘的生命:这样按数目累计,他总共夺走了那五百位比丘的生命。巴利
Hotiyevabhayanti maraṇaṃ paṭicca cittutrāso hoti. Hoti chambhitattanti hadayamaṃsaṃ ādiṃ katvā tasmā sarīracalanaṃ hoti; atibhayena thaddhasarīrattantipi eke, thambhitattañhi chambhitattanti vuccati. Lomahaṃsoti uddhaṃṭhitalomatā, khīṇāsavā pana sattasuññatāya sudiṭṭhattā maraṇakasattameva na passanti, tasmā tesaṃ sabbampetaṃ nāhosīti veditabbaṃ. Ekampi bhikkhuṃ dvepi…pe… saṭṭhimpi bhikkhū ekāhena jīvitā voropesīti evaṃ gaṇanavasena sabbānipi tāni pañca bhikkhusatāni jīvitā voropesi.
164 从独处静坐中起来后,他了知那五百位比丘已经命终,于是从独处的状态中出来。他虽然心里清楚,却装作不知道,为了引出话题,便对阿难尊者说:“阿难,为什么比丘僧团好像变少了呢?阿难,在此之前,很多比丘一起来到跟前侍奉、受持课诵、提问、诵习,园林看起来就像一片光明;可现在才过了大约半个月,比丘僧团就显得稀薄、萎靡、迟钝、稀少、稀疏零落。这是什么原因呢?比丘们是否已分散到各方去了?”巴利
164.Paṭisallānā vuṭṭhitoti tesaṃ pañcannaṃ bhikkhusatānaṃ jīvitakkhayapattabhāvaṃ ñatvā tato ekībhāvato vuṭṭhito jānantopi ajānanto viya kathāsamuṭṭhāpanatthaṃ āyasmantaṃ ānandaṃ āmantesi. Kiṃ nu kho ānanda tanubhūto viya bhikkhusaṅghoti ānanda ito pubbe bahū bhikkhū ekato upaṭṭhānaṃ āgacchanti, uddesaṃ paripucchaṃ gaṇhanti sajjhāyanti, ekapajjoto viya ārāmo dissati, idāni pana addhamāsamattassa accayena tanubhūto viya tanuko mando appako viraḷaviraḷo viya jāto bhikkhusaṅgho. Kinnu kho kāraṇaṃ, kiṃ disāsu pakkantā bhikkhūti?
这时,阿难尊者没有察觉到那五百位比丘是因为业报而命终,只看到他们是因为修习不净业处的缘故,于是说了“确实如此,尊者,世尊”等话,接着为了替比丘们求一个能证得阿拉汉果的其他业处,又说了“萨度,尊者,世尊”等话。这段话的意思是:萨度,尊者,世尊,请开示另一个方法,让比丘僧团能够安立在阿拉汉果上。就像大海有许多可以下水的渡口一样,趣入涅槃的业处也有很多,比如十随念、十遍、四界差别、梵住、入出息念等。世尊应当先安慰比丘们,然后为他们开示其中某一种业处——这就是他的意图。巴利
Athāyasmā ānando kammavipākena tesaṃ jīvitakkhayappattiṃ asallakkhento asubhakammaṭṭhānānuyogapaccayā pana sallakkhento ‘‘tathā hi pana bhante bhagavā’’tiādiṃ vatvā bhikkhūnaṃ arahattappattiyā aññaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ yācanto ‘‘sādhu bhante bhagavā’’tiādimāha. Tassattho – sādhu bhante bhagavā aññaṃ kāraṇaṃ ācikkhatu, yena bhikkhusaṅgho arahatte patiṭṭhaheyya; mahāsamuddaṃ orohaṇatitthāni viya hi aññānipi dasānussatidasakasiṇacatudhātuvavatthānabrahmavihārānāpānasatippabhedāni bahūni nibbānorohaṇakammaṭṭhānāni santi. Tesu bhagavā bhikkhū samassāsetvā aññataraṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ ācikkhatūti adhippāyo.
这时,世尊想照那样去做,就打发长老离开,说了“那么,阿难……”等话。其中,“依止毗舍离”的意思是:依止毗舍离,凡在周围一牛吼地或半由旬之内居住的比丘,全都要召集起来。把他们都召集到集会堂之后,自己亲自去该去的地方,又派年轻比丘到别处去,片刻之间就把所有比丘一个不剩地聚到集会堂里。“尊者,现在世尊认为时机到了”,这里的意思是:世尊,比丘僧团已经集合了,现在正是给比丘们说法、给予教诫的时候,现在您认为时机已到的事,就应当去做。巴利
Atha bhagavā tathā kātukāmo theraṃ uyyojento ‘‘tenahānandā’’tiādimāha. Tattha vesāliṃ upanissāyāti vesāliṃ upanissāya samantā gāvutepi addhayojanepi yāvatikā bhikkhū viharanti , te sabbe sannipātehīti attho. Te sabbe upaṭṭhānasālāyaṃ sannipātetvāti attanā gantuṃ yuttaṭṭhānaṃ sayaṃ gantvā aññattha daharabhikkhū pahiṇitvā muhutteneva anavasese bhikkhū upaṭṭhānasālāyaṃ samūhaṃ katvā. Yassa dāni bhante bhagavā kālaṃ maññatīti ettha ayamadhippāyo – bhagavā bhikkhusaṅgho sannipatito esa kālo bhikkhūnaṃ dhammakathaṃ kātuṃ, anusāsaniṃ dātuṃ, idāni yassa tumhe kālaṃ jānātha, taṃ kattabbanti.
入出息念定论巴利
Ānāpānassatisamādhikathā
165 那时,世尊……中略……对比丘们说:“比丘们,这个也是……”这样招呼之后,为了给比丘们指出一条不同于先前为了证得阿拉汉果而教导的不净业处的修行途径,便说:“入出息念定。”巴利
165. Atha kho bhagavā…pe… bhikkhū āmantesi – ayampi kho bhikkhaveti āmantetvā ca pana bhikkhūnaṃ arahattappattiyā pubbe ācikkhitaasubhakammaṭṭhānato aññaṃ pariyāyaṃ ācikkhanto ‘‘ānāpānassatisamādhī’’ti āha.
现在,因为世尊正是为了向比丘们开示寂静殊胜的业处才说了这段经文,所以我在这里不省略任何内容,按照义理贯连的次第来作注释。其中,对“比丘们,此亦是”这一句,先这样贯连理解:比丘们,不只是不净修习能导向烦恼的断除,而且这入出息念定……中略……也能使它们止息。巴利
Idāni yasmā bhagavatā bhikkhūnaṃ santapaṇītakammaṭṭhānadassanatthameva ayaṃ pāḷi vuttā, tasmā aparihāpetvā atthayojanākkamaṃ ettha vaṇṇanaṃ karissāmi. Tatra ‘‘ayampi kho bhikkhave’’ti imassa tāva padassa ayaṃ yojanā – bhikkhave na kevalaṃ asubhabhāvanāyeva kilesappahānāya saṃvattati, apica ayampi kho ānāpānassatisamādhi…pe… vūpasametīti.
这里的义理注释是:入出息念,就是专注把握入息和出息的念。这在《无碍解道》中已经说过:巴利
Ayaṃ panettha atthavaṇṇanā – ānāpānassatīti assāsapassāsapariggāhikā sati. Vuttañhetaṃ paṭisambhidāyaṃ –
入息是入息,不是出息;出息是出息,不是入息。依靠入息而现起的念,依靠出息而现起的念。入息的人,这念在他那里现起;出息的人,这念在他那里现起。巴利
‘‘Ānanti assāso, no passāso. Apānanti passāso, no assāso. Assāsavasena upaṭṭhānaṃ sati, passāsavasena upaṭṭhānaṃ sati. Yo assasati tassupaṭṭhāti, yo passasati tassupaṭṭhātī’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.160).
所谓“定”,就是与那能收摄入出息的正念一同生起的心一境性。而且,这个开示是以“定”为标题,不是以“念”为标题。所以,与入出息念相应的定,就是入出息念定;或者说,在入出息念当中的定,就是入出息念定。这里的含义应当这样理解。“已修习”:已经令它生起、已经令它增长。“已多作”:已经反复地做。“既寂静又殊胜”:既是寂静的,又是殊胜的,这两个词都应当依据“既……又……”这个说法来确定。这是什么意思呢?就拿不净业处来说:单从证悟的角度看,它是寂静的、殊胜的;但若就所缘来看,由于所缘粗重、由于所缘可厌,它便既不寂静,也不殊胜。入出息念定却不是这样:无论从哪一方面说,它都绝不是不寂静,也不是不殊胜。相反,它寂静、止息、寂灭,是因为所缘的寂静;它寂静,是因为称为证悟支分的那些法的寂静;它殊胜、令人不满足,是因为所缘的殊胜;它殊胜,是因为支分的殊胜。因此说“既寂静又殊胜”。巴利
Samādhīti tāya ānāpānapariggāhikāya satiyā saddhiṃ uppannā cittekaggatā; samādhisīsena cāyaṃ desanā, na satisīsena. Tasmā ānāpānassatiyā yutto samādhi ānāpānassatisamādhi, ānāpānassatiyaṃ vā samādhi ānāpānassatisamādhīti evamettha attho veditabbo. Bhāvitoti uppādito vaḍḍhito ca. Bahulīkatoti punappunaṃ kato. Santo ceva paṇīto cāti santo ceva paṇīto ceva, ubhayattha evasaddena niyamo veditabbo. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? Ayañhi yathā asubhakammaṭṭhānaṃ kevalaṃ paṭivedhavasena santañca paṇītañca oḷārikārammaṇattā pana paṭikūlārammaṇattā ca ārammaṇavasena neva santaṃ na paṇītaṃ, na evaṃ kenaci pariyāyena asanto vā appaṇīto vā, apica kho ārammaṇasantatāyapi santo vūpasanto nibbuto paṭivedhasaṅkhātaaṅgasantatāyapi ārammaṇappaṇītatāyapi paṇīto atittikaro aṅgappaṇītatāyapīti. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘santo ceva paṇīto cā’’ti.
“无浇灌且安乐的住”:在这里,“无其浇灌故为无浇灌”,即未被浇灌、未混杂、独特、不共;这里并不是靠遍作或近行才有寂静,而是从最初作意开始,就以其自性本身而寂静、殊胜。不过有些人说,“无浇灌”是未被浇灌、具滋养、自性甘美。应当知道,这无浇灌且安乐的住,因为在安止的那一刻能导向获得身心的乐,所以是安乐的住。巴利
Asecanako ca sukho ca vihāroti ettha pana nāssa secananti asecanako anāsittako abbokiṇṇo pāṭekko āveṇiko, natthettha parikammena vā upacārena vā santatā ādimanasikārato pabhuti attano sabhāveneva santo ca paṇīto cāti attho. Keci pana asecanakoti anāsittako ojavanto sabhāveneva madhuroti vadanti. Evamayaṃ asecanako ca appitappitakkhaṇe kāyikacetasikasukhappaṭilābhāya saṃvattanato sukho ca vihāroti veditabbo.
已生起的、已生起的:指的是那些还没有被镇伏的、还没有被镇伏的。恶:就是低劣的。不善法:就是从无善巧所生的法。立即令其消失:就是在刹那间令其消失、加以镇伏。令止息:就是好好地令之止息;或者,因为是属于顺决择分的,所以随着圣道的逐步增长而断除、令寂止,这也是一种解释。巴利
Uppannuppanneti avikkhambhite avikkhambhite. Pāpaketi lāmake. Akusale dhammeti akosallasambhūte dhamme. Ṭhānaso antaradhāpetīti khaṇeneva antaradhāpeti vikkhambheti. Vūpasametīti suṭṭhu upasameti, nibbedhabhāgiyattā vā anupubbena ariyamaggavuḍḍhippato samucchindati paṭippassambhetītipi attho.
“犹如”是譬喻的举例说明。“在夏季的最后一个月”,就是阿沙荼月。“被扬起的尘土”,是指在半个月里,地面被风吹日晒变得干燥,又被牛、水牛等踩踏得破碎,尘土和微尘向上扬起、飘到空中。“巨大的非时云”,是指覆盖整个天空后生起、在阿沙荼月白分整整半个月里降雨的云。因为它是在雨季还没到的时候出现的,所以这里指的就是“非时云”。“立即令其消失”,就是刹那间让它看不见,让它沉落到地面上。“同样地”,这是譬喻的对应说明。此后就按照前面所说的方式理解。巴利
Seyyathāpīti opammanidassanametaṃ. Gimhānaṃ pacchime māseti āsāḷhamāse. Ūhataṃ rajojallanti addhamāse vātātapasukkhāya gomahiṃsādipādappahārasambhinnāya pathaviyā uddhaṃ hataṃ ūhataṃ ākāse samuṭṭhitaṃ rajañca reṇuñca. Mahā akālameghoti sabbaṃ nabhaṃ ajjhottharitvā uṭṭhito āsāḷhajuṇhapakkhe sakalaṃ addhamāsaṃ vassanakamegho. So hi asampatte vassakāle uppannattā akālameghoti idhādhippeto. Ṭhānaso antaradhāpeti vūpasametīti khaṇeneva adassanaṃ neti, pathaviyaṃ sannisīdāpeti. Evameva khoti opammasampaṭipādanametaṃ. Tato paraṃ vuttanayameva.
现在,“诸比丘,如何修习入出息念定”这里,“如何”是希望从多方面详细解说入出息念定修习的提问。“诸比丘,修习入出息念定”则是针对所问之法、希望从多方面详细解说的开示。第二句也是这样。这里简要的含义是:诸比丘,以何种方式、以何种行相、以何种方法修习、多作入出息念定,才能寂静……中略……令止息呢?巴利
Idāni kathaṃ bhāvito ca bhikkhave ānāpānassatisamādhīti ettha kathanti ānāpānassatisamādhibhāvanaṃ nānappakārato vitthāretukamyatāpucchā. Bhāvito ca bhikkhave ānāpānassatisamādhīti nānappakārato vitthāretukamyatāya puṭṭhadhammanidassanaṃ . Esa nayo dutiyapadepi. Ayaṃ panettha saṅkhepattho – bhikkhave kenapakārena kenākārena kena vidhinā bhāvito ānāpānassatisamādhi kenapakārena bahulīkato santo ceva…pe… vūpasametīti.
现在,为详细说明这件事的含义,说了“诸比丘,在此……”等话。其中,“诸比丘,在此,比丘”的意思是:比丘们,在这个教法中的比丘。这里,“在此”一词用来说明:能生起一切种类入出息念定的修行者,所依止的正是这个教法;同时它也否定了其他教法具有同样的性质。因为圣典中这样说:“诸比丘,只有在此处,有沙门……其他外道教说则空无沙门。”因此说“在这个教法中的比丘”。巴利
Idāni tamatthaṃ vitthārento ‘‘idha bhikkhave’’tiādimāha. Tattha idha bhikkhave bhikkhūti bhikkhave imasmiṃ sāsane bhikkhu. Ayañhettha idhasaddo sabbappakāraānāpānassatisamādhinibbattakassa puggalassa sannissayabhūtasāsanaparidīpano aññasāsanassa tathābhāvapaṭisedhano ca. Vuttañhetaṃ – ‘‘idheva, bhikkhave, samaṇo…pe… suññā parappavādā samaṇebhi aññehī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.139). Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘imasmiṃ sāsane bhikkhū’’ti.
前往林野……中略……或前往空寂之处,这是为了说明:为他选取与入出息念定的修习相适应的住处。因为这位比丘长久以来心一直散逸在色等所缘上,不愿意登上入出息念定这个所缘,就像套了野牛的马车,只往岔路上狂奔。所以,好比有个牧牛人,想驯服一头喝足了狡诈母牛之奶而长大的狡诈小牛,就把它从母牛身边带走,在一边埋下一根大木桩,然后用绳子把它绑在那里。那头小牛东挣西跳也逃不掉,就只能靠近那根木桩,或者卧在它旁边。同样,这位比丘想调伏长久以来因品尝色等所缘之味而养大的顽劣之心,也应把心从色等所缘上带开,进入林野……中略……或空寂之处,在那里用念的绳子把心绑在入出息这根木桩上。这样,他的心即使东挣西跳,也得不到过去习惯的所缘,无法挣断念绳逃走,就只能通过近行定和安止定的方式,靠近并安住在那同一个所缘上。因此,古德们说:巴利
Araññagato vā…pe… suññāgāragato vāti idamassa ānāpānassatisamādhibhāvanānurūpasenāsanapariggahaparidīpanaṃ. Imassa hi bhikkhuno dīgharattaṃ rūpādīsu ārammaṇesu anuvisaṭaṃ cittaṃ ānāpānassatisamādhiārammaṇaṃ abhiruhituṃ na icchati. Kūṭagoṇayuttaratho viya uppathameva dhāvati. Tasmā seyyathāpi nāma gopo kūṭadhenuyā sabbaṃ khīraṃ pivitvā vaḍḍhitaṃ kūṭavacchaṃ dametukāmo dhenuto apanetvā ekamante mahantaṃ thambhaṃ nikhaṇitvā tattha yottena bandheyya. Athassa so vaccho ito cito ca vipphanditvā palāyituṃ asakkonto tameva thambhaṃ upanisīdeyya vā upanipajjeyya vā; evameva imināpi bhikkhunā dīgharattaṃ rūpārammaṇādirasapānavaḍḍhitaṃ duṭṭhacittaṃ dametukāmena rūpādiārammaṇato apanetvā araññaṃ vā…pe… suññāgāraṃ vā pavesetvā tattha assāsapassāsathambhe satiyottena bandhitabbaṃ. Evamassa taṃ cittaṃ ito cito ca vipphanditvāpi pubbe āciṇṇārammaṇaṃ alabhamānaṃ satiyottaṃ chinditvā palāyituṃ asakkontaṃ tamevārammaṇaṃ upacārappanāvasena upanisīdati ceva upanipajjati ca. Tenāhu porāṇā –
“ 就像有人在这里,把一头需要调教的小牛绑在木桩上;
应当这样把自己的心牢牢系在念的所缘上。”巴利
‘‘Yathā thambhe nibandheyya, vacchaṃ dammaṃ naro idha; Bandheyyevaṃ sakaṃ cittaṃ, satiyārammaṇe daḷha’’nti. (visuddhi. 1.217; dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.374; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.107; paṭi. ma. aṭṭha. 2.1.163);
这样一来,这个住处就适合他修行。因此说:“这是为了说明随顺他修习入出息念定而选取住处的解释。”巴利
Evamassetaṃ senāsanaṃ bhāvanānurūpaṃ hoti. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘idamassa ānāpānassatisamaādhibhāvanānurūpasenāsanapariggahaparidīpana’’nti.
或者,因为入出息念这种业处是一切业处当中最上等的,是一切知佛、独觉佛和佛弟子证得殊胜成就与现法乐住的基础。如果不离开充满女人、男人、象、马等声音的村落周边,就不容易修成,因为声音是禅那的刺。而在没有村落的林野中,瑜伽行者就容易把握这种业处,修成入出息第四禅,再以它作为基础来思惟诸行,证得最高的果位——阿拉汉果。所以,世尊为了指出适合他的住处,才说了“前往林野……”等话。巴利
Atha vā yasmā idaṃ kammaṭṭhānappabhede muddhabhūtaṃ sabbaññubuddhapaccekabuddhabuddhasāvakānaṃ visesādhigamadiṭṭhadhammasukhavihārapadaṭṭhānaṃ ānāpānassatikammaṭṭhānaṃ itthipurisahatthiassādisaddasamākulaṃ gāmantaṃ apariccajitvā na sukaraṃ sampādetuṃ, saddakaṇṭakattā jhānassa. Agāmake pana araññe sukaraṃ yogāvacarena idaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ pariggahetvā ānāpānacatutthajjhānaṃ nibbattetvā tadeva ca pādakaṃ katvā saṅkhāre sammasitvā aggaphalaṃ arahattaṃ sampāpuṇituṃ, tasmāssa anurūpaṃsenāsanaṃ dassento bhagavā ‘‘araññagato vā’’tiādimāha.
世尊就像一位建筑风水师。正如建筑风水师会先观察建城的地形,仔细勘察之后才指示说“在这里建城”,等城市顺利建成,就能从王室得到丰厚的供养和敬重;同样地,世尊为修行者考察了合适的住处之后,才指示说“应当在这里修习业处”。之后,修行者按照教导在那个地方精勤修习业处,依次证得阿拉汉果时,就会对世尊生起极大的敬重:“世尊确实是正自觉者。”而这位比丘被称为“如豹者”。就像大豹王在森林里,依靠草丛、树林或山岩隐蔽自己,然后捕猎野牛、羚羊、野猪等野兽;同样地,这位在森林等处精勤修习业处的比丘,应当知道他会依次证得入流道、一来道、不来道、阿拉汉道以及圣果。因此,古德们说:巴利
Vatthuvijjācariyo viya hi bhagavā, so yathā vatthuvijjācariyo nagarabhūmiṃ passitvā suṭṭhu upaparikkhitvā ‘‘ettha nagaraṃ māpethā’’ti upadisati, sotthinā ca nagare niṭṭhite rājakulato mahāsakkāraṃ labhati; evameva yogāvacarassa anurūpasenāsanaṃ upaparikkhitvā ettha kammaṭṭhānaṃ anuyuñjitabbanti upadisati. Tato tattha kammaṭṭhānaṃ anuyuttena yoginā kamena arahatte patte ‘‘sammāsambuddho vata so bhagavā’’ti mahantaṃ sakkāraṃ labhati. Ayaṃ pana bhikkhu ‘‘dīpisadiso’’ti vuccati. Yathā hi mahādīpirājā araññe tiṇagahanaṃ vā vanagahanaṃ vā pabbatagahanaṃ vā nissāya nilīyitvā vanamahiṃsagokaṇṇasūkarādayo mige gaṇhāti; evamevāyaṃ araññādīsu kammaṭṭhānaṃ anuyuñjanto bhikkhu yathākkamena sotāpattisakadāgāmianāgāmiarahattamagge ceva ariyaphalañca gaṇhātīti veditabbo. Tenāhu porāṇā –
“ 就像一种叫豹的动物,先藏起来,再捕捉野兽;
同样,这位佛子精勤于修习,是位观禅者;
走进森林之后,他摘取最殊胜的果实。”巴利
‘‘Yathāpi dīpiko nāma, nilīyitvā gaṇhatī mige; Tathevāyaṃ buddhaputto, yuttayogo vipassako; Araññaṃ pavisitvāna, gaṇhāti phalamuttama’’nti. (mi. pa. 6.1.5);
世尊为了向他指出适合精进、策励与用功的林野住处,就说了“前往林野……”等话。巴利
Tenassa parakkamajavayoggabhūmiṃ araññasenāsanaṃ dassento bhagavā ‘‘araññagato vā’’tiādimāha.
其中,“前往林野”:所谓林野,按照“出了门槛之外,那一切都是林野”以及“所谓林野住所,最少也要离村五百弓”这样的说法所描述的林野,凡是适合获得独处之乐的,他都已前往。“前往树下”:就是到了树的附近。“前往空寂之处”:就是到了空旷寂静的地方。在这里,除了林野和树下之外,其余七种住所也可以说成是“前往空寂之处”。这样,为他开示了适合三季、适合界与性行、适合修习入出息念的住所之后,接着开示远离昏沉与掉举的寂静威仪,所以说“坐下”。然后,为了显示坐姿的稳固、呼吸运行的舒适以及把握所缘的方法,说了“结跏趺坐……”等话。巴利
Tattha araññagato vāti araññanti ‘‘nikkhamitvā bahi indakhīlā sabbametaṃ arañña’’nti (vibha. 529) ca ‘‘āraññakaṃ nāma senāsanaṃ pañcadhanusatikaṃ pacchima’’nti (pārā. 653) ca evaṃ vuttalakkhaṇesu araññesu anurūpaṃ yaṃkiñci pavivekasukhaṃ araññaṃ gato. Rukkhamūlagato vāti rukkhasamīpaṃ gato. Suññāgāragato vāti suññaṃ vivittokāsaṃ gato. Ettha ca ṭhapetvā araññañca rukkhamūlañca avasesasattavidhasenāsanagatopi suññāgāragatoti vattuṃ vaṭṭati. Evamassa ututtayānukūlaṃ dhātucariyānukūlañca ānāpānassatibhāvanānurūpaṃ senāsanaṃ upadisitvā alīnānuddhaccapakkhikaṃ santamiriyāpathaṃ upadisanto ‘‘nisīdatī’’ti āha. Athassa nisajjāya daḷhabhāvaṃ assāsapassāsānaṃ pavattanasukhataṃ ārammaṇapariggahūpāyañca dassento ‘‘pallaṅkaṃ ābhujitvā’’tiādimāha.
在这其中,“结跏趺坐”是指把双腿从四周盘绑起来的坐姿。“盘结”就是绑紧、系牢。“把身体挺直”是指把上半身摆正,让十八节脊椎骨一节对一节地接正。这样坐好之后,皮肤、肌肉、筋腱就不会弯曲。当它们不弯曲时,那些因为弯曲而可能在每一刹那生起的受就不会生起。那些受不生起时,心就能专一,业处不会散乱退失,而是不断增长、扩展。巴利
Tattha pallaṅkanti samantato ūrubaddhāsanaṃ. Ābhujitvāti ābandhitvā. Ujuṃ kāyaṃ paṇidhāyāti uparimaṃ sarīraṃ ujukaṃ ṭhapetvā, aṭṭhārasa piṭṭhikaṇṭake koṭiyā koṭiṃ paṭipādetvā. Evañhi nisinnassa cammamaṃsanhārūni na paṇamanti. Athassa yā tesaṃ paṇamanappaccayā khaṇe khaṇe vedanā uppajjeyyuṃ, tā na uppajjanti. Tāsu anuppajjamānāsu cittaṃ ekaggaṃ hoti. Kammaṭṭhānaṃ na paripatati. Vuḍḍhiṃ phātiṃ upagacchati.
把念安放在面前:就是把念安放在业处的前面。或者,“遍”(pari)是把握的意思;“面”(mukha)是出离的意思;“念”(sati)是安住的意思;因此说“把念安放在面前”。这里也应按照《无碍解道》(Paṭi. Ma. 1.164-165)所说的方法来理解其含义。这里的简要意思是:已经把握、已经出离的念。他正念地入息:那位比丘这样坐着,这样把念安立起来之后,不让那念丢失,正念地入息,正念地出息,成为正念的实行者——这就是所说的意思。巴利
Parimukhaṃ satiṃ upaṭṭhapetvāti kammaṭṭhānābhimukhaṃ satiṃ ṭhapayitvā. Atha vā ‘‘parī’’ti pariggahaṭṭho; ‘‘mukha’’nti niyyānaṭṭho; ‘‘satī’’ti upaṭṭhānaṭṭho; tena vuccati – ‘‘parimukhaṃ satiṃ upaṭṭhapetvā’’ti. Evaṃ paṭisambhidāyaṃ (paṭi. ma. 1.164-165) vuttanayenapettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Tatrāyaṃ saṅkhepo – ‘‘pariggahitaniyyānaṃ satiṃ katvā’’ti. So satova assasatīti so bhikkhu evaṃ nisīditvā evañca satiṃ upaṭṭhapetvā taṃ satiṃ avijahanto satoeva assasati, sato passasati, satokārī hotīti vuttaṃ hoti.
现在,为了说明他以哪些方式成为正念而行者,便说了“长入息”等话。这层意思在《无碍解道》中已经说过,也就是在对“他正念地入息,正念地出息”这句话的分别解释里:巴利
Idāni yehākārehi satokārī hoti, te dassento ‘‘dīghaṃ vā assasanto’’tiādimāha. Vuttañhetaṃ paṭisambhidāyaṃ – ‘‘so satova assasati, sato passasatī’’ti etasseva vibhaṅge –
以三十二种方式成为正念而行者:以长入息,对了知心的一境性、不散乱的人,念现起。他以那念、那智成为正念而行者。以长出息……(中略)……以随观弃舍而入息、以随观弃舍而出息,对了知心的一境性、不散乱的人,念现起。他以那念、那智成为正念而行者。巴利
‘‘Bāttiṃsāya ākārehi satokārī hoti. Dīghaṃ assāsavasena cittassa ekaggataṃ avikkhepaṃ pajānato sati upaṭṭhitā hoti. Tāya satiyā tena ñāṇena satokārī hoti. Dīghaṃ passāsavasena…pe… paṭinissaggānupassī assāsavasena paṭinissaggānupassī passāsavasena cittassa ekaggataṃ avikkhepaṃ pajānato sati upaṭṭhitā hoti. Tāya satiyā tena ñāṇena satokārī hotī’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.165).
在这里,“长出息”指的是让出息持续地生起。“出息”是向外呼出去的风,“入息”是从外面吸进来的风。不过在经藏注释书里,它们是按相反的顺序出现的。巴利
Tattha dīghaṃ vā assasantoti dīghaṃ vā assāsaṃ pavattento. ‘‘Assāso’’ti bahi nikkhamanavāto. ‘‘Passāso’’ti anto pavisanavāto. Suttantaṭṭhakathāsu pana uppaṭipāṭiyā āgataṃ.
在这里,一切住胎众生从母胎出来的时候,最先是一股内在的风向外排出。随后,外面的风带着细微的尘土进入体内,碰到上颚就停息了。入息和出息应当这样来理解。至于它们的长短,则要依据距离来理解。就像水或沙子填满某个空间而停留时,会说“长水、长沙”或“短水、短沙”。同样,那些极其细微的入息和出息,在象的身体和蛇的身体里,缓慢地充满并缓慢地排出那被称为“自身”的长距离,所以称为“长”;在狗、兔等身上,则快速地充满并快速地排出那被称为“自身”的短距离,所以称为“短”。在人当中,有些人像象、蛇等那样,按时间和距离而有长的入息和出息;有些人像狗、兔等那样,则是短的。因此,对他们来说,按时间,经历长距离而出入的,就是长;经历短距离而出入的,应当知道是短。在这里,这位比丘以九种方式,当长入息、长出息时,了知“我长入息、我长出息”。应当知道,这样了知的人,就以一种方式成就了身随观念处的修习。正如《无碍解道》所说:巴利
Tattha sabbesampi gabbhaseyyakānaṃ mātukucchito nikkhamanakāle paṭhamaṃ abbhantaravāto bahi nikkhamati. Pacchā bāhiravāto sukhumaṃ rajaṃ gahetvā abbhantaraṃ pavisanto tāluṃ āhacca nibbāyati. Evaṃ tāva assāsapassāsā veditabbā. Yā pana tesaṃ dīgharassatā, sā addhānavasena veditabbā. Yathā hi okāsaddhānaṃ pharitvā ṭhitaṃ udakaṃ vā vālikā vā ‘‘dīghamudakaṃ dīghā vālikā, rassamudakaṃ rassā vālikā’’ti vuccati. Evaṃ cuṇṇavicuṇṇāpi assāsapassāsā hatthisarīre ahisarīre ca tesaṃ attabhāvasaṅkhātaṃ dīghaṃ addhānaṃ saṇikaṃ pūretvā saṇikameva nikkhamanti, tasmā ‘‘dīghā’’ti vuccanti. Sunakhasasādīnaṃ attabhāvasaṅkhātaṃ rassaṃ addhānaṃ sīghaṃ pūretvā sīghameva nikkhamanti, tasmā ‘‘rassā’’ti vuccanti. Manussesu pana keci hatthiahiādayo viya kāladdhānavasena dīghaṃ assasanti ca passasanti ca. Keci sunakhasasādayo viya rassaṃ. Tasmā tesaṃ kālavasena dīghamaddhānaṃ nikkhamantā ca pavisantā ca te dīghā. Ittaramaddhānaṃ nikkhamantā ca pavisantā ca ‘‘rassā’’ti veditabbā. Tatrāyaṃ bhikkhu navahākārehi dīghaṃ assasanto ca passasanto ca ‘‘dīghaṃ assasāmi passasāmī’’ti pajānāti. Evaṃ pajānato cassa ekenākārena kāyānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānabhāvanā sampajjatīti veditabbā. Yathāha paṭisambhidāyaṃ –
怎样在长入息时了知“我长入息”,在长出息时了知“我长出息?他在被称为距离的长入息上入息,在被称为距离的长出息上出息,在被称为距离的长入出息上入息也出息。当他在被称为距离的长入出息上入息也出息时,欲生起;由于欲,他在被称为距离、比之前更微细的长入息上入息,由于欲,他在被称为距离、比之前更微细的长出息上出息,由于欲,他在被称为距离、比之前更微细的长入出息上入息也出息。当他在由于欲而被称为距离、比之前更微细的长入出息上入息也出息时,喜悦生起;由于喜悦,他在被称为距离、比之前更微细的长入息上入息,由于喜悦,他在被称为距离、比之前更微细的长出息上出息……在被称为距离的长入出息上入息也出息。当他在由于喜悦而被称为距离、比之前更微细的长入出息上入息也出息时,心从长入出息转向,舍安住。以这九种方式,长入出息是身;现起是念;随观是智。身是现起,不是念;念既是现起也是念。他以那念、那智随观那身。因此说:于身修习身随观念处。巴利
‘‘Kathaṃ dīghaṃ assasanto ‘dīghaṃ assasāmī’ti pajānāti, dīghaṃ passasanto ‘dīghaṃ passasāmī’ti pajānāti? Dīghaṃ assāsaṃ addhānasaṅkhāte assasati, dīghaṃ passāsaṃ addhānasaṅkhāte passasati, dīghaṃ assāsapassāsaṃ addhānasaṅkhāte assasatipi passasatipi. Dīghaṃ assāsapassāsaṃ addhānasaṅkhāte assasatopi passasatopi chando uppajjati; chandavasena tato sukhumataraṃ dīghaṃ assāsaṃ addhānasaṅkhāte assasati, chandavasena tato sukhumataraṃ dīghaṃ passāsaṃ addhānasaṅkhāte passasati, chandavasena tato sukhumataraṃ dīghaṃ assāsapassāsaṃ addhānasaṅkhāte assasatipi passasatipi. Chandavasena tato sukhumataraṃ dīghaṃ assāsapassāsaṃ addhānasaṅkhāte assasatopi passasatopi pāmojjaṃ uppajjati; pāmojjavasena tato sukhumataraṃ dīghaṃ assāsaṃ addhānasaṅkhāte assasati, pāmojjavasena tato sukhumataraṃ dīghaṃ passāsaṃ…pe… dīghaṃ assāsapassāsaṃ addhānasaṅkhāte assasatipi passasatipi. Pāmojjavasena tato sukhumataraṃ dīghaṃ assāsapassāsaṃ addhānasaṅkhāte assasatopi passasatopi dīghaṃ assāsapassāsā cittaṃ vivattati, upekkhā saṇṭhāti. Imehi navahi ākārehi dīghaṃ assāsapassāsā kāyo; upaṭṭhānaṃ sati; anupassanā ñāṇaṃ; kāyo upaṭṭhānaṃ, no sati; sati upaṭṭhānañceva sati ca. Tāya satiyā tena ñāṇena taṃ kāyaṃ anupassati. Tena vuccati – ‘‘kāye kāyānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānabhāvanā’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.166).
同样的方法也适用于短息的段落。不过这里有一个差别:在长息那段说的是“以称为长时的长入息”,而在这里说的是“以称为短促的短入息而入息”。所以,按照这个方式,应当一直贯通到“因此称为于身修习身随观念处”为止。应当知道,这位修行者就这样依长时和依短促,以这些方式了知入息和出息:当长入息时,他了知“我长入息”……当短出息时,他了知“我短出息”。巴利
Eseva nayo rassapadepi. Ayaṃ pana viseso – ‘‘yathā ettha ‘dīghaṃ assāsaṃ addhānasaṅkhāte’ti vuttaṃ; evamidha ‘rassaṃ assāsaṃ ittarasaṅkhāte assasatī’’ti āgataṃ. Tasmā tassa vasena yāva ‘‘tena vuccati kāye kāyānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānabhāvanā’’ti tāva yojetabbaṃ. Evamayaṃ addhānavasena ittaravasena ca imehākārehi assāsapassāse pajānanto dīghaṃ vā assasanto ‘‘dīghaṃ assasāmī’’ti pajānāti…pe… rassaṃ vā passasanto ‘‘rassaṃ passasāmī’’ti pajānātīti veditabbo.
“ 入息有长有短;
出息也同样如此。
存在四种颜色。
就在比丘的鼻端。”巴利
‘‘Dīgho rasso ca assāso; Passāsopi ca tādiso; Cattāro vaṇṇā vattanti; Nāsikaggeva bhikkhuno’’ti. (visuddhi. 1.219; paṭi. ma. aṭṭha. 2.1.163);
“我应当觉知整个入息身而入息……我应当觉知整个出息身而出息……这样来修学。”意思是:让整个入息身的初、中、后三个阶段都被清楚地知道、被明显地觉察,同时修学“我应当入息”;让整个出息身的初、中、后三个阶段都被清楚地知道、被明显地觉察,同时修学“我应当出息”。像这样让它们被清楚地知道、被明显地觉察时,他就是以与智慧相应的心在入息,也在出息;因此说“我应当入息、我应当出息,这样来修学”。确实,有一位比丘,在细碎散开的入息身或出息身中,只有初段变得明显,中段和后段不明显。他只能把握初段,在中段和后段上感到吃力。有一位比丘,只有中段变得明显,初段和后段不明显。他只能把握中段,在初段和后段上感到吃力。有一位比丘,只有后段变得明显,初段和中段不明显。他只能把握后段,在初段和中段上感到吃力。有一位比丘,全部三个阶段都变得明显,他能够把握全部,在任何地方都不感到吃力。为了说明应当成为这样的修行者,世尊说:“我应当觉知整个入息身而入息……我应当觉知整个出息身而出息……这样来修学。”巴利
Sabbakāyappaṭisaṃvedīassasissāmi…pe… passasissāmīti sikkhatīti sakalassa assāsakāyassa ādimajjhapariyosānaṃ viditaṃ karonto pākaṭaṃ karonto ‘‘assasissāmī’’ti sikkhati. Sakalassa passāsakāyassa ādimajjhapariyosānaṃ viditaṃ karonto pākaṭaṃ karonto ‘‘passasissāmī’’ti sikkhati. Evaṃ viditaṃ karonto pākaṭaṃ karonto ñāṇasampayuttacittena assasati ceva passasati ca; tasmā ‘‘assasissāmi passasissāmī’’ti sikkhatīti vuccati. Ekassa hi bhikkhuno cuṇṇavicuṇṇavisaṭe assāsakāye passāsakāye vā ādi pākaṭo hoti, na majjhapariyosānaṃ. So ādimeva pariggahetuṃ sakkoti, majjhapariyosāne kilamati. Ekassa majjhaṃ pākaṭaṃ hoti, na ādipariyosānaṃ. So majjhameva pariggahetuṃ sakkoti, ādipariyosāne kilamati. Ekassa pariyosānaṃ pākaṭaṃ hoti, na ādimajjhaṃ. So pariyosānaṃyeva pariggahetuṃ sakkoti, ādimajjhe kilamati. Ekassa sabbampi pākaṭaṃ hoti, so sabbampi pariggahetuṃ sakkoti, na katthaci kilamati. Tādisena bhavitabbanti dassento āha – ‘‘sabbakāyappaṭisaṃvedī assasissāmi…pe… passasissāmīti sikkhatī’’ti.
在这里,“学”就是这样的精勤和努力。或者,对于这样状态的人来说,他的防护就是这里的增上戒学;他的定就是增上心学;他的慧就是增上慧学。应当这样理解这里的含义:他依靠那念、那作意,在那个所缘上,学习、练习、修习、反复修持这三种学。其中,在先前的方式里,只需要入息和出息,不需要做别的什么;但从这里开始,则应当致力于生起智慧等。因此,在先前的方式里,只是依现在时态说“他知道‘我入息’、他知道‘我出息’”;从这里开始,为了显示应当做的生起智慧等行相,就以“我当觉知全身而入息”等说法,用未来时态来安立经文,应当这样理解。巴利
Tattha sikkhatīti evaṃ ghaṭati vāyamati. Yo vā tathābhūtassa saṃvaro; ayamettha adhisīlasikkhā. Yo tathābhūtassa samādhi; ayaṃ adhicittasikkhā. Yā tathābhūtassa paññā; ayaṃ adhipaññāsikkhāti. Imā tisso sikkhāyo tasmiṃ ārammaṇe tāya satiyā tena manasikārena sikkhati āsevati bhāveti bahulīkarotīti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Tattha yasmā purimanaye kevalaṃ assasitabbaṃ passasitabbameva ca, na aññaṃ kiñci kātabbaṃ; ito paṭṭhāya pana ñāṇuppādanādīsu yogo karaṇīyo. Tasmā tattha ‘‘assasāmīti pajānāti passasāmīti pajānāti’’cceva vattamānakālavasena pāḷiṃ vatvā ito paṭṭhāya kattabbassa ñāṇuppādanādino ākārassa dassanatthaṃ ‘‘sabbakāyappaṭisaṃvedī assasissāmī’’tiādinā nayena anāgatavacanavasena pāḷi āropitāti veditabbā.
他训练自己:“我要让身行平静下来,入息……我要让身行平静下来,出息。”也就是说,他让粗重的身行(呼吸)平息、止息、灭去、寂静下来,同时训练自己:“我要入息,我要出息。”巴利
Passambhayaṃ kāyasaṅkhāraṃ assasissāmi…pe… passasissāmīti sikkhatīti oḷārikaṃ kāyasaṅkhāraṃ passambhento paṭippassambhento nirodhento vūpasamento assasissāmi passasissāmīti sikkhati.
在这里,应当这样理解粗重与微细,以及轻安。因为这位比丘在还没有收摄身心的时候,身体和心都是躁动不安的。由于粗重的身心还没有平息,呼吸也就粗重,变得很强,不断地生起,光靠鼻子已经不够用,他张着嘴吸气和呼气。可是,当他的身体和心都被收摄之后,它们就变得宁静、平息了。当它们平息之后,呼吸就变得微细,生起时到了让人要分辨“到底还有没有”的程度。就像一个人跑完步,或者从山上下来,或者把重担从头顶卸下之后站着,他的呼吸是粗重的,鼻子不够用,他张着嘴吸气和呼气。可是,当他消除了疲劳,洗了澡、喝了水,把湿布敷在心口,躺在清凉的树荫下时,他的呼吸就变得微细,到了让人要分辨“到底还有没有”的程度。同样地,这位比丘在之前还没有收摄身心的阶段,身体和心……乃至到了让人要分辨的程度。这是什么原因呢?因为他在之前还没有收摄身心的阶段,并没有“我要让粗重的身行平息”这样的转向、专注、作意和观察;而在收摄身心的阶段,这些都有了。因此,从还没有收摄身心的阶段到收摄身心的阶段,他的身行变得微细。所以古德们说:巴利
Tatrevaṃ oḷārikasukhumatā ca passaddhi ca veditabbā. Imassa hi bhikkhuno pubbe apariggahitakāle kāyo ca cittañca sadarathā honti. Oḷārikānaṃ kāyacittānaṃ oḷārikatte avūpasante assāsapassāsāpi oḷārikā honti, balavatarā hutvā pavattanti, nāsikā nappahoti, mukhena assasantopi passasantopi tiṭṭhati. Yadā panassa kāyopi cittampi pariggahitā honti, tadā te santā honti vūpasantā. Tesu vūpasantesu assāsapassāsā sukhumā hutvā pavattanti, ‘‘atthi nu kho natthī’’ti vicetabbākārappattā honti. Seyyathāpi purisassa dhāvitvā pabbatā vā orohitvā mahābhāraṃ vā sīsato oropetvā ṭhitassa oḷārikā assāsapassāsā honti, nāsikā nappahoti, mukhena assasantopi passasantopi tiṭṭhati. Yadā panesa taṃ parissamaṃ vinodetvā nhatvā ca pivitvā ca allasāṭakaṃ hadaye katvā sītāya chāyāya nipanno hoti, athassa te assāsapassāsā sukhumā honti, ‘‘atthi nu kho natthī’’ti vicetabbākārappattā. Evameva imassa bhikkhuno pubbe apariggahitakāle kāyo ca…pe… vicetabbākārappattā honti. Taṃ kissa hetu? Tathā hissa pubbe apariggahitakāle ‘‘oḷārikoḷārike kāyasaṅkhāre passambhemī’’ti ābhogasamannāhāramanasikārapaccavekkhaṇā natthi, pariggahitakāle pana atthi. Tenassa apariggahitakālato pariggahitakāle kāyasaṅkhāro sukhumo hoti. Tenāhu porāṇā –
“ 当身体和心被搅动时,它就变得特别强烈。
身体不躁动时,它变得微细而运转。”巴利
‘‘Sāraddhe kāye citte ca, adhimattaṃ pavattati; Asāraddhamhi kāyamhi, sukhumaṃ sampavattatī’’ti. (visuddhi. 1.220; paṭi. ma. aṭṭha. 2.1.163);
在把握呼吸的阶段,呼吸也是粗的;到了初禅的近行定,呼吸就变细了。而在初禅近行定中,呼吸是粗的;到了初禅本身,呼吸就变细了。在初禅和第二禅的近行定中,呼吸是粗的;到了第二禅,呼吸就变细了。在第二禅和第三禅的近行定中,呼吸是粗的;到了第三禅,呼吸就变细了。在第三禅和第四禅的近行定中,呼吸是粗的;到了第四禅,呼吸就变得极其微细,几乎不再运行了。以上这是长部诵者和相应部诵者的主张。巴利
Pariggahepi oḷāriko, paṭhamajjhānūpacāre sukhumo; tasmimpi oḷāriko paṭhamajjhāne sukhumo. Paṭhamajjhāne ca dutiyajjhānūpacāre ca oḷāriko, dutiyajjhāne sukhumo. Dutiyajjhāne ca tatiyajjhānūpacāre ca oḷāriko, tatiyajjhāne sukhumo. Tatiyajjhāne ca catutthajjhānūpacāre ca oḷāriko, catutthajjhāne atisukhumo appavattimeva pāpuṇāti. Idaṃ tāva dīghabhāṇakasaṃyuttabhāṇakānaṃ mataṃ.
中部诵者则认为:“在初禅时(呼吸)是粗的,在第二禅近行定时是细的。”他们主张,从较低的禅那到较高的禅那近行定,呼吸越来越细。不过,按照所有诵者共同接受的观点:未专注于(呼吸)时生起的身行,在专注时止息;专注时生起的身行,在初禅近行定时止息……在第四禅近行定时生起的身行,在第四禅时止息。以上就是止(奢摩他修行)的方法,暂且至此。巴利
Majjhimabhāṇakā pana ‘‘paṭhamajjhāne oḷāriko, dutiyajjhānūpacāre sukhumo’’ti evaṃ heṭṭhimaheṭṭhimajjhānato uparūparijjhānūpacārepi sukhumataraṃ icchanti. Sabbesaṃyeva pana matena apariggahitakāle pavattakāyasaṅkhāro pariggahitakāle paṭippassambhati, pariggahitakāle pavattakāyasaṅkhāro paṭhamajjhānūpacāre…pe… catutthajjhānūpacāre pavattakāyasaṅkhāro catutthajjhāne paṭippassambhati. Ayaṃ tāva samathe nayo.
在观修中,如果还没有对所缘加以把握,这时生起的身行是粗的;一旦把握了四大种,身行就变细了。而那个(把握四大种时的行)相对(前面的阶段)还是粗的,把握所造色时才是细的。那个又还是粗的,把握全部色法时才是细的。那个又还是粗的,把握无色法时才是细的。那个又还是粗的,把握色法与无色法时才是细的。那个又还是粗的,把握缘时才是细的。那个又还是粗的,把握有缘的名色时才是细的。那个又还是粗的,以诸行相为所缘的观修中才是细的。那个在弱的观修中还是粗的,在强的观修中才是细的。在这里,应当依照前面所说的方式,了知前一个阶段的行被后一个阶段的行所止息。如此,在这里应当了知行相的粗与细,以及它的止息。巴利
Vipassanāyaṃ pana apariggahe pavatto kāyasaṅkhāro oḷāriko, mahābhūtapariggahe sukhumo. Sopi oḷāriko, upādārūpapariggahe sukhumo. Sopi oḷāriko, sakalarūpapariggahe sukhumo. Sopi oḷāriko, arūpapariggahe sukhumo. Sopi oḷāriko, rūpārūpapariggahe sukhumo. Sopi oḷāriko, paccayapariggahe sukhumo. Sopi oḷāriko, sappaccayanāmarūpapariggahe sukhumo. Sopi oḷāriko, lakkhaṇārammaṇikavipassanāya sukhumo. Sopi dubbalavipassanāya oḷāriko, balavavipassanāya sukhumo. Tattha pubbe vuttanayeneva purimassa purimassa pacchimena pacchimena passaddhi veditabbā. Evamettha oḷārikasukhumatā ca passaddhi ca veditabbā.
在《无碍解道》中,配合它的问难与解答,这个意思是这样说的:“怎样修学‘我令身行止息而吸入……’……‘……而呼出’呢?什么是身行?长吸入是属身体的、系属于身的这些法,这就是身行;他修学令那些身行止息、灭去、平静。长呼出是属身体的这些法……短吸入……短呼出……觉知全身而吸入……觉知全身而呼出,这些是属身体的、系属于身的法,这就是身行;他修学令那些身行止息、灭去、平静。”巴利
Paṭisambhidāyaṃ panassa saddhiṃ codanāsodhanāhi evamattho vutto – ‘‘kathaṃ passambhayaṃ kāyasaṅkhāraṃ assasissāmi…pe… passasissāmī’’ti sikkhati? Katame kāyasaṅkhārā? Dīghaṃ assāsā kāyikā ete dhammā kāyappaṭibaddhā kāyasaṅkhārā, te kāyasaṅkhāre passambhento nirodhento vūpasamento sikkhati. Dīghaṃ passāsā kāyikā ete dhammā…pe… rassaṃ assāsā…pe… rassaṃ passāsā… sabbakāyappaṭisaṃvedī assāsā… sabbakāyappaṭisaṃvedī passāsā kāyikā ete dhammā kāyappaṭibaddhā kāyasaṅkhārā, te kāyasaṅkhāre passambhento nirodhento vūpasamento sikkhati.
以这样的身行——身体的弯曲、伸直、收拢、伸展、移动、颤动、动摇、震动——他修学:我要让身行平息而入息;他修学:我要让身行平息而出息。巴利
Yathārūpehi kāyasaṅkhārehi yā kāyassa ānamanā vinamanā sannamanā paṇamanā iñjanā phandanā calanā kampanā passambhayaṃ kāyasaṅkhāraṃ assasissāmīti sikkhati, passambhayaṃ kāyasaṅkhāraṃ passasissāmīti sikkhati.
对于具备这样性质的身行——也就是身体不弯曲、不歪斜、不收缩、不伸展、不移动、不颤动、不摇动、不震动——他修学:我要让寂静、微细的身行平息下来而入息;他修学:我要让寂静、微细的身行平息下来而出息。巴利
Yathārūpehi kāyasaṅkhārehi yā kāyassa na ānamanā na vinamanā na sannamanā na paṇamanā aniñjanā aphandanā acalanā akampanā, santaṃ sukhumaṃ passambhayaṃ kāyasaṅkhāraṃ assasissāmīti sikkhati, passambhayaṃ kāyasaṅkhāraṃ passasissāmīti sikkhati.
据说,他这样训练:我要一边平息身行一边入息;我要一边平息身行一边出息。如果情况是这样的话,就不会有对风的修习,不会有对入出息本身的修习,不会有对入出息念的修习,但并非没有对入出息念定的修习;而且智者既不会进入那种等至,也不会从那种等至出定。巴利
Iti kira passambhayaṃ kāyasaṅkhāraṃ assasissāmīti sikkhati, passambhayaṃ kāyasaṅkhāraṃ passasissāmīti sikkhati. Evaṃ sante vātūpaladdhiyā ca pabhāvanā na hoti, assāsapassāsānañca pabhāvanā na hoti, ānāpānassatiyā ca pabhāvanā na hoti, ānāpānassatisamādhissa ca pabhāvanā na na hoti, na ca naṃ taṃ samāpattiṃ paṇḍitā samāpajjantipi vuṭṭhahantipi.
据说,他这样训练自己:“我要平息身行而入息……出息。”当这种状态存在时,风的获得之修习就发生了,入出息的修习也发生了,入出息念的修习也发生了,入出息念定的修习也发生了;而智者既能进入那种等至,也能从中出来。巴利
Iti kira passambhayaṃ kāyasaṅkhāraṃ assasissāmi…pe… passasissāmīti sikkhati. Evaṃ sante vātūpaladdhiyā ca pabhāvanā hoti, assāsapassāsānañca pabhāvanā hoti, ānāpānassatiyā ca pabhāvanā hoti, ānāpānassatisamādhissa ca pabhāvanā hoti, tañca naṃ samāpattiṃ paṇḍitā samāpajjantipi vuṭṭhahantipi.
打个比方来说,就像敲击铜器的时候,最先响起的是粗重的声音。因为对粗重声音的相已经好好把握、好好作意、好好确认,所以即使粗重的声音消失了,接下来还会响起微细的声音。因为对微细声音的相已经好好把握、好好作意、好好确认,所以即使微细的声音也消失了,接下来心仍然会以微细声音的相为所缘而继续运转。同样地,最先生起的是粗的入出息。因为对粗的入出息的相已经好好把握、好好作意、好好确认,所以即使粗的入出息停止了,接下来还会生起细的入出息。因为对细的入出息的相已经好好把握、好好作意、好好确认,所以即使细的入出息也停止了,接下来心仍然会以细的入出息的相为所缘,而不会散乱。巴利
Yathā kathaṃ viya? Seyyathāpi kaṃse ākoṭite paṭhamaṃ oḷārikā saddā pavattanti, oḷārikānaṃ saddānaṃ nimittaṃ suggahitattā sumanasikatattā sūpadhāritattā niruddhepi oḷārike sadde atha pacchā sukhumakā saddā pavattanti, sukhumakānaṃ saddānaṃ nimittaṃ suggahitattā sumanasikatattā sūpadhāritattā niruddhepi sukhumake sadde atha pacchā sukhumasaddanimittārammaṇatāpi cittaṃ pavattati; evameva paṭhamaṃ oḷārikā assāsapassāsā pavattanti, oḷārikānaṃ assāsapassāsānaṃ nimittaṃ suggahitattā sumanasikatattā sūpadhāritattā niruddhepi oḷārike assāsapassāse atha pacchā sukhumakā assāsapassāsā pavattanti, sukhumakānaṃ assāsapassāsānaṃ nimittaṃ suggahitattā sumanasikatattā sūpadhāritattā niruddhepi sukhumake assāsapassāse atha pacchā sukhumaassāsapassāsanimittārammaṇatāpi cittaṃ na vikkhepaṃ gacchati.
事情到了这个地步,风的获得之修习也起来了,入出息的修习也起来了,入出息念的修习也起来了,入出息念定的修习也起来了,而且智者会进入这种等至,也会从这种等至出来。巴利
Evaṃ sante vātūpaladdhiyā ca pabhāvanā hoti, assāsapassāsānañca pabhāvanā hoti, ānāpānassatiyā ca pabhāvanā hoti, ānāpānassatisamādhissa ca pabhāvanā hoti, tañca naṃ samāpattiṃ paṇḍitā samāpajjantipi vuṭṭhahantipi.
使身行平息:入出息就是身,现起是念,随观是智。身是现起,但不是念;念既是现起,也是念。他以那个念、那个智随观那个身。因此说:“于身,修习身随观念处。”巴利
Passambhayaṃ kāyasaṅkhāranti assāsapassāsā kāyo, upaṭṭhānaṃ sati, anupassanā ñāṇaṃ. Kāyo upaṭṭhānaṃ no sati, sati upaṭṭhānañceva sati ca, tāya satiyā tena ñāṇena taṃ kāyaṃ anupassati. Tena vuccati – ‘‘kāye kāyānupassanā satipaṭṭhānabhāvanāti (paṭi. ma. 1.171).
这里先就依身随观所说的第一组四法,逐词加以解释。巴利
Ayaṃ tāvettha kāyānupassanāvasena vuttassa paṭhamacatukkassa anupubbapadavaṇṇanā.
在这里,这第一组四法只是为初学者作为业处来说的;其余三组四法,则是为已经证得禅那的人,依受随观、心随观、法随观来说的。因此,想通过修习这个业处,以入出息念第四禅作为观禅的近因,连同无碍解一起证得阿拉汉果的佛弟子,所应当做的一切,在这里首先都要依初学者的情形,从最开始就这样来理解。首先,应当清净四种戒。其中,清净有三种:不犯戒、犯戒后出罪、不被烦恼逼迫。因为只有戒清净的人,修习才能成就。还有,塔院义务、菩提树院义务、戒师义务、教授师义务、浴室义务、伍波萨他堂义务、八十二种犍度义务、十四种大义务,依这些而说的增上行仪戒,也应当好好圆满。如果有人说:“我守护戒就好了,何必还要做增上行仪的事?”他的戒不可能圆满。相反,增上行仪的义务圆满时,戒就圆满;戒圆满时,定就能孕育出来。世尊确实这样说过:“诸比丘,若比丘不圆满增上行仪法,却说‘我要圆满诸戒’,这是不可能的。”(《增支部》5.21)应当广说。因此,他应当好好圆满这称为塔院义务等的增上行仪戒。接着:巴利
Yasmā panettha idameva catukkaṃ ādikammikassa kammaṭṭhānavasena vuttaṃ, itarāni pana tīṇi catukkāni ettha pattajjhānassa vedanācittadhammānupassanāvasena vuttāni, tasmā idaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ bhāvetvā ānāpānassaticatutthajjhānapadaṭṭhānāya vipassanāya saha paṭisambhidāhi arahattaṃ pāpuṇitukāmena buddhaputtena yaṃ kātabbaṃ taṃ sabbaṃ idheva tāva ādikammikassa kulaputtassa vasena ādito pabhuti evaṃ veditabbaṃ. Catubbidhaṃ tāva sīlaṃ visodhetabbaṃ. Tattha tividhā visodhanā – anāpajjanaṃ, āpannavuṭṭhānaṃ, kilesehi ca appatipīḷanaṃ. Evaṃ visuddhasīlassa hi bhāvanā sampajjati. Yampidaṃ cetiyaṅgaṇavattaṃ bodhiyaṅgaṇavattaṃ upajjhāyavattaṃ ācariyavattaṃ jantāgharavattaṃ uposathāgāravattaṃ dveasīti khandhakavattāni cuddasavidhaṃ mahāvattanti imesaṃ vasena ābhisamācārikasīlaṃ vuccati, tampi sādhukaṃ paripūretabbaṃ. Yo hi ‘‘ahaṃ sīlaṃ rakkhāmi, kiṃ ābhisamācārikena kamma’’nti vadeyya, tassa sīlaṃ paripūressatīti netaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjati. Ābhisamācārikavatte pana paripūre sīlaṃ paripūrati, sīle paripūre samādhi gabbhaṃ gaṇhāti. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā – ‘‘so vata, bhikkhave, bhikkhu ābhisamācārikaṃ dhammaṃ aparipūretvā ‘sīlāni paripūressatī’ti netaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjatī’’ti (a. ni. 5.21) vitthāretabbaṃ. Tasmā tena yampidaṃ cetiyaṅgaṇavattādi ābhisamācārikasīlaṃ vuccati, tampi sādhukaṃ paripūretabbaṃ. Tato –
“ 住处、家族、利得,团体以及业为第五。
远行、亲属、疾病、经教研习、神通,这就是那十种。”巴利
‘‘Āvāso ca kulaṃ lābho, gaṇo kammañca pañcamaṃ; Addhānaṃ ñāti ābādho, gantho iddhīti te dasā’’ti.
对于以上所说的十种障碍,存在哪一种障碍,就该把它断除。巴利
Evaṃ vuttesu dasasu palibodhesu yo palibodho atthi, so upacchinditabbo.
像这样断除了障碍之后,就应该学习业处。业处也有两种:一切处业处和守护业处。其中,所谓一切处业处,就是对比丘僧团等修慈,以及死随念;也有人说不净想也算。修业处的比丘首先应该划定范围,对界内的比丘僧团修慈,然后对界内的诸天神修慈,然后对行境村落中有权势的人修慈,然后对那里的人,再扩展到一切众生。因为他对僧团修慈,能让同住的人心生柔软,于是他就能和他们安乐共住。对界内诸天神修慈,诸天神因为心被慈软化,就会以如法的守护好好地保护他。对行境村落中有权势的人修慈,那些有权势的人因为心相续被慈软化,就会以如法的守护好好地保护他的资具。对那里的人修慈,因为那些人被他以慈使心生净信,他就能不被他们轻视地生活。对一切众生修慈,他就能在一切处所行无碍。巴利
Evaṃ upacchinnapalibodhena kammaṭṭhānaṃ uggahetabbaṃ. Tampi duvidhaṃ hoti – sabbatthakakammaṭṭhānañca pārihāriyakammaṭṭhānañca. Tattha sabbatthakakammaṭṭhānaṃ nāma bhikkhusaṅghādīsu mettā maraṇassati ca asubhasaññātipi eke. Kammaṭṭhānikena hi bhikkhunā paṭhamaṃ tāva paricchinditvā sīmaṭṭhakabhikkhusaṅghe mettā bhāvetabbā; tato sīmaṭṭhakadevatāsu, tato gocaragāme issarajane, tato tattha manusse upādāya sabbasattesu. So hi bhikkhusaṅghe mettāya sahavāsīnaṃ muducittataṃ janeti, athassa sukhasaṃvāsatā hoti. Sīmaṭṭhakadevatāsu mettāya mudukatacittāhi devatāhi dhammikāya rakkhāya susaṃvihitārakkho hoti. Gocaragāme issarajane mettāya mudukatacittasantānehi issarehi dhammikāya rakkhāya surakkhitaparikkhāro hoti. Tattha manussesu mettāya pasāditacittehi tehi aparibhūto hutvā vicarati. Sabbasattesu mettāya sabbattha appaṭihatacāro hoti.
而对于死随念,当人这样思惟“我一定会死”时,就会舍弃不正当的寻求,悚惧感不断增长,成为不退缩、不懈怠的人。通过不净想,即使面对天界的所缘,也不会生起渴爱。因此,这三种(业处)因为具有极大的利益,被认为“应当在一切处希求、应当希求”,又因为它们是所希求的瑜伽精勤业的近因,所以称为“一切处业处”。巴利
Maraṇassatiyā pana ‘‘avassaṃ maritabba’’nti cintento anesanaṃ pahāya uparūparivaḍḍhamānasaṃvego anolīnavuttiko hoti. Asubhasaññāya dibbesupi ārammaṇesu taṇhā nuppajjati. Tenassetaṃ tayaṃ evaṃ bahūpakārattā ‘‘sabbattha atthayitabbaṃ icchitabba’’nti katvā adhippetassa ca yogānuyogakammassa padaṭṭhānattā ‘‘sabbatthakakammaṭṭhāna’’nti vuccati.
在三十八种所缘里,哪一种适合某个人的性格,他就应当一直守护那一种,所以按照前面说过的方法,这也叫做“应当守护的业处”。不过在这里,入出息念这个业处本身就被称为“应当守护的业处”。这是这里的简要说明。如果想了解详细内容,就应当从《清净道论》中获取戒清净的论述和断除障碍的论述。巴利
Aṭṭhatiṃsārammaṇesu pana yaṃ yassa caritānukūlaṃ, taṃ tassa niccaṃ pariharitabbattā yathāvutteneva nayena ‘‘pārihāriyakammaṭṭhāna’’ntipi vuccati. Idha pana idameva ānāpānasssātikammaṭṭhānaṃ ‘‘pārihāriyakammaṭṭhāna’’nti vuccati. Ayamettha saṅkhepo. Vitthāro pana sīlavisodhanakathaṃ palibodhupacchedakathañca icchantena visuddhimaggato gahetabbo.
戒清净且断除了障碍的人,在学这个业处时,应当亲近一位佛弟子——他依靠这个业处证得了第四禅,修成了观禅,达到了阿拉汉果——并在他面前学习。如果找不到这样的人,就向一位不来学习;如果找不到,就向一位一来学习;如果找不到,就向一位入流者学习;如果找不到,就向一位证得入出息念第四禅的人学习;如果找不到,就向一位对巴利圣典和注释不迷惑、能作决断的导师学习。因为阿拉汉等人只宣说自己所证得的道。而这位导师,就像在密林中开出一条大象走的路一样,在一切处都不迷惑,能辨别适合与不适合之后再说。巴利
Evaṃ visuddhasīlena pana upacchinnapalibodhena ca idaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ uggaṇhantena imināva kammaṭṭhānena catutthajjhānaṃ nibbattetvā vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā arahattaṃ pattassa buddhaputtassa santike uggahetabbaṃ. Taṃ alabhantena anāgāmissa, tampi alabhantena sakadāgāmissa, tampi alabhantena sotāpannassa, tampi alabhantena ānāpānacatutthajjhānalābhissa, tampi alabhantena pāḷiyā aṭṭhakathāya ca asammūḷhassa vinicchayācariyassa santike uggahetabbaṃ. Arahantādayo hi attanā adhigatamaggameva ācikkhanti. Ayaṃ pana gahanapadese mahāhatthipathaṃ nīharanto viya sabbattha asammūḷho sappāyāsappāyaṃ paricchinditvā katheti.
这里接着按顺序说明:那位比丘应当生活简朴,具足戒律与行仪,然后去亲近前面所说的那种导师,用服侍和依教奉行来让导师心生欢喜,然后在导师面前学习具备五个环节的业处。这五个环节就是:学习、遍问、现起、安止、相。其中,“学习”是指学取业处;“遍问”是指对业处反复询问;“现起”是指业处在心中显现;“安止”是指心安住在业处上;“相”是指业处的相。也就是说,要把握“这个业处有这样的相”,这就是在掌握业处的自性。巴利
Tatrāyaṃ anupubbikathā – tena bhikkhunā sallahukavuttinā vinayācārasampannena vuttappakāramācariyaṃ upasaṅkamitvā vattapaṭipattiyā ārādhitacittassa tassa santike pañcasandhikaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ uggahetabbaṃ. Tatrime pañca sandhayo – uggaho, paripucchā, upaṭṭhānaṃ, appanā, lakkhaṇanti. Tattha ‘‘uggaho’’ nāma kammaṭṭhānassa uggaṇhanaṃ, ‘‘paripucchā’’ nāma kammaṭṭhānassa paripucchanā, ‘‘upaṭṭhānaṃ’’ nāma kammaṭṭhānassa upaṭṭhānaṃ, ‘‘appanā’’ nāma kammaṭṭhānappanā, ‘‘lakkhaṇaṃ’’ nāma kammaṭṭhānassa lakkhaṇaṃ. ‘‘Evaṃlakkhaṇamidaṃ kammaṭṭhāna’’nti kammaṭṭhānasabhāvūpadhāraṇanti vuttaṃ hoti.
像这样学习五支业处时,自己不会疲惫,也不会让导师受累。所以,应当先请导师简要地讲解,然后长时间反复诵习,这样掌握了五支业处之后,如果那个地方适合,就该住在那里。如果那个地方不适合,就向导师告辞:如果是钝根的人,最多走一由旬;如果是利根的人,走远一点也可以。然后前往一个远离十八种住处过失、具备五种住处条件的住处,到了那里住下来,要断除琐碎的牵挂,吃完饭,消除饭后的昏沉,通过随念三宝的功德让心生起欢喜,从导师那里学来的哪怕一句话也不忘失,应当这样作意这个入出息念业处。这就是这里的简要说明。如果想要详细知道,就应该从《清净道论》里取来。巴利
Evaṃ pañcasandhikaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ uggaṇhanto attanāpi na kilamati, ācariyampi na viheṭheti; tasmā thokaṃ uddisāpetvā bahukālaṃ sajjhāyitvā evaṃ pañcasandhikaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ uggahetvā sace tattha sappāyaṃ hoti, tattheva vasitabbaṃ. No ce tattha sappāyaṃ hoti, ācariyaṃ āpucchitvā sace mandapañño yojanaparamaṃ gantvā, sace tikkhapañño dūrampi gantvā aṭṭhārasasenāsanadosavivajjitaṃ, pañcasenāsanaṅgasamannāgataṃ senāsanaṃ upagamma tattha vasantena upacchinnakhuddakapalibodhena katabhattakiccena bhattasammadaṃ paṭivinodetvā ratanattayaguṇānussaraṇena cittaṃ sampahaṃsetvā ācariyuggahato ekapadampi asammussantena idaṃ ānāpānassatikammaṭṭhānaṃ manasikātabbaṃ. Ayamettha saṅkhepo. Vitthāro pana imaṃ kathāmaggaṃ icchantena visuddhimaggato (visuddhi. 1.55) gahetabbo.
那么,对于前面所说的“应当作意这个入出息念业处”,这里作意的方法是这样的——巴利
Yaṃ pana vuttaṃ ‘‘idaṃ ānāpānassatikammaṭṭhānaṃ manasikātabba’’nti tatrāyaṃ manasikāravidhi –
“ 计数、随逐、触、安住、审察,
还转、清净,以及对它们的省察。”巴利
‘‘Gaṇanā anubandhanā, phusanā ṭhapanā sallakkhaṇā; Vivaṭṭanā pārisuddhi, tesañca paṭipassanā’’ti. (visuddhi. 1.223; paṭi. ma. aṭṭha. 2.1.163);
“计数”就是计数。“随逐”就是跟随。“触”就是所触之处。“安止”就是安止定。“观察”就是观。“转向”就是道。“清净”就是果。“对它们的省察”就是省察。在这里,初学的善男子首先应当以计数来作意这个业处。计数时,不应低于五,不应超过十,中间不应出现间断。因为如果低于五,心在狭窄的空间里生起时就会躁动,就像牛群被关在狭窄的牛栏里一样。如果超过十,心就会依赖计数才生起。如果中间出现间断,心就会动摇,想:“我的业处是不是已经达到顶点了?”因此,应当避免这些过失而计数。巴利
‘‘Gaṇanā’’ti gaṇanāyeva. ‘‘Anubandhanā’’ti anuvahanā. ‘‘Phusanā’’ti phuṭṭhaṭṭhānaṃ. ‘‘Ṭhapanā’’ti appanā. ‘‘Sallakkhaṇā’’ti vipassanā. ‘‘Vivaṭṭanā’’ti maggo. ‘‘Pārisuddhī’’ti phalaṃ. ‘‘Tesañca paṭipassanā’’ti paccavekkhaṇā. Tattha iminā ādikammikakulaputtena paṭhamaṃ gaṇanāya idaṃ kamaṭṭhānaṃ manasikātabbaṃ. Gaṇentena ca pañcannaṃ heṭṭhā na ṭhapetabbaṃ, dasannaṃ upari na netabbaṃ, antare khaṇḍaṃ na dassetabbaṃ. Pañcannaṃ heṭṭhā ṭhapentassa hi sambādhe okāse cittuppādo vipphandati, sambādhe vaje sanniruddhagogaṇo viya. Dasannaṃ upari nentassa gaṇanānissitova cittuppādo hoti. Antarā khaṇḍaṃ dassentassa ‘‘sikhāppattaṃ nu kho me kammaṭṭhānaṃ, no’’ti cittaṃ vikampati. Tasmā ete dose vajjetvā gaṇetabbaṃ.
计数时,首先要采用缓慢的计数方式,就像量谷人计数那样。量谷人把一升容器装满,说一声“一”,然后倒出来。再装的时候,如果看到一点杂物,就把它扔掉,嘴里说着“一、一”。对“二、二”等等也是这样。同样地,在这里也应当取入出息中现起的那一次,从“一、一”开始,一直到“十、十”,随着每一次生起而观察、计数。他这样计数的时候,呼出和吸入的入出息就变得清晰了。巴利
Gaṇentena ca paṭhamaṃ dandhagaṇanāya dhaññamāpakagaṇanāya gaṇetabbaṃ. Dhaññamāpako hi nāḷiṃ pūretvā ‘‘eka’’nti vatvā okirati. Puna pūrento kiñci kacavaraṃ disvā taṃ chaḍḍento ‘‘ekaṃ eka’’nti vadati. Esa nayo ‘‘dve dve’’tiādīsu. Evameva imināpi assāsapassāsesu yo upaṭṭhāti taṃ gahetvā ‘‘ekaṃ eka’’nti ādiṃkatvā yāva ‘‘dasa dasā’’ti pavattamānaṃ pavattamānaṃ upalakkhetvāva gaṇetabbaṃ. Tassevaṃ gaṇayato nikkhamantā ca pavisantā ca assāsapassāsā pākaṭā honti.
这时,他应该放弃那种慢吞吞的计数方式,也就是像量谷人那样的数法,改用快速的计数方式,也就是像牧牛人那样的数法。因为一个熟练的牧牛人,早上用衣角兜着石子,手里拿着绳子和棍子,来到牛栏,拍打牛背,然后坐在门闩柱的顶上。每当一头牛走到门口,他就扔一颗石子,数“一、二”。整夜被关在拥挤狭窄的地方、吃尽苦头的牛群,出栏时互相挤撞,一群一群地急冲出来。他也跟着飞快地数“三、四、五、十”。同样地,这个人按前面说的方法计数时,入出息变得清楚了,就会越来越快地反复运行。他由此知道“它们在反复运行”,于是不取内也不取外,只取那到达门口的息,飞快地数:“一、二、三、四、五;一、二、三、四、五、六;一、二、三、四、五、六、七……八……九……十。”因为在与计数相连的业处中,单靠计数之力,心就能得专一,就像在湍急的水流中靠舵把船稳住一样。巴利
Athānena taṃ dandhagaṇanaṃ dhaññamāpakagaṇanaṃ pahāya sīghagaṇanāya gopālakagaṇanāya gaṇetabbaṃ . Cheko hi gopālako sakkharāyo ucchaṅgena gahetvā rajjudaṇḍahattho pātova vajaṃ gantvā gāvo piṭṭhiyaṃ paharitvā palighatthambhamatthake nisinno dvāraṃ pattaṃ pattaṃyeva gāvaṃ ‘‘eko dve’’ti sakkharaṃ khipitvā khipitvā gaṇeti. Tiyāmarattiṃ sambādhe okāse dukkhaṃ vutthagogaṇo nikkhamanto aññamaññaṃ upanighaṃsanto vegena vegena puñjo puñjo hutvā nikkhamati. So vegena vegena ‘‘tīṇi cattāri pañca dasā’’ti gaṇetiyeva. Evamimassāpi purimanayena gaṇayato assāsapassāsā pākaṭā hutvā sīghaṃ sīghaṃ punappunaṃ sañcaranti. Tato tena ‘‘punappunaṃ sañcarantī’’ti ñatvā anto ca bahi ca aggahetvā dvārappattaṃ dvārappattaṃyeva gahetvā ‘‘eko dve tīṇi cattāri pañca , eko dve tīṇi cattāri pañca cha, eko dve tīṇi cattāri pañca cha satta…pe… aṭṭha… nava… dasā’’ti sīghaṃ sīghaṃ gaṇetabbameva. Gaṇanāpaṭibaddhe hi kammaṭṭhāne gaṇanābaleneva cittaṃ ekaggaṃ hoti arittūpatthambhanavasena caṇḍasote nāvāṭhapanamiva.
当他这样快速地计数时,业处就像不间断地运转一样显现出来。这时,知道“它不间断地运转”之后,不去执取内风和外风,只按前面的方法越来越快地计数。因为如果让心随着入内的风一起进去,内部就像被风冲击、充满脂肪一样;如果让心随着外出的风一起出去,心就会向外散乱到各种不同的所缘上。但是,如果把念安住在触处上而修习,修习才能成就。因此说:“不执取内风和外风,只按前面的方法越来越快地计数。”巴利
Tassevaṃ sīghaṃ sīghaṃ gaṇayato kammaṭṭhānaṃ nirantarappavattaṃ viya hutvā upaṭṭhāti. Atha ‘‘nirantaraṃ pavattatī’’ti ñatvā anto ca bahi ca vātaṃ apariggahetvā purimanayeneva vegena vegena gaṇetabbaṃ. Antopavisanavātena hi saddhiṃ cittaṃ pavesayato abbhantaraṃ vātabbhāhataṃ medapūritaṃ viya hoti, bahinikkhamanavātena saddhiṃ cittaṃ nīharato bahiddhā puthuttārammaṇe cittaṃ vikkhipati. Phuṭṭhokāse pana satiṃ ṭhapetvā bhāventasseva bhāvanā sampajjati. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘anto ca bahi ca vātaṃ apariggahetvā purimanayeneva vegena vegena gaṇetabba’’nti.
那么,要计数到多久呢?直到不靠计数,念也能安住在出入息的所缘上。因为计数就是为了切断向外散乱的寻思,让念稳稳地安住在出入息的所缘上。巴利
Kīva ciraṃ panetaṃ gaṇetabbanti? Yāva vinā gaṇanāya assāsapassāsārammaṇe sati santiṭṭhati. Bahi visaṭavitakkavicchedaṃ katvā assāsapassāsārammaṇe sati saṇṭhapanatthaṃyeva hi gaṇanāti.
像这样用计数来作意之后,就应该用随逐来作意。所谓随逐,就是放下计数,用念不间断地跟随入息和出息;而且这不是按初、中、后三段来跟随。因为对于呼出的风,脐是初,心脏是中,鼻端是后;对于吸入的风,鼻端是初,心脏是中,脐是后。如果跟随它时心散乱到别处,身心就会变得躁动、动摇。正如所说的:巴利
Evaṃ gaṇanāya manasikatvā anubandhanāya manasikātabbaṃ. Anubandhanā nāma gaṇanaṃ paṭisaṃharitvā satiyā nirantaraṃ assāsapassāsānaṃ anugamanaṃ; tañca kho na ādimajjhapariyosānānugamanavasena. Bahinikkhamanavātassa hi nābhi ādi, hadayaṃ majjhaṃ, nāsikaggaṃ pariyosānaṃ. Abbhantarapavisanavātassa nāsikaggaṃ ādi, hadayaṃ majjhaṃ, nābhi pariyosānaṃ. Tañcassa anugacchato vikkhepagataṃ cittaṃ sāraddhāya ceva hoti iñjanāya ca. Yathāha –
以正念随逐入息的初、中、后时,如果心向内散乱,那么身体和心都会变得躁动、动摇、颤动。以正念随逐出息的初、中、后时,如果心向外散乱,那么身体和心也都会变得躁动、动摇、颤动。巴利
‘‘Assāsādimajjhapariyosānaṃ satiyā anugacchato ajjhattaṃ vikkhepagatena cittena kāyopi cittampi sāraddhā ca honti iñjitā ca phanditā ca. Passāsādimajjhapariyosānaṃ satiyā anugacchato bahiddhā vikkhepagatena cittena kāyopi cittampi sāraddhā ca honti iñjitā ca phanditā cā’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.157).
因此,以随逐的方式作意时,不应按初、中、末来作意,而应以触和安住的方式来作意。而且,它并不像计数随逐那样,把触与安住分开来各自作意。只是在每一个被触到的点上计数时,他既在作意计数,也在作意触。就在那一点上把计数收摄回来,以念随逐,并以安止的方式安放心,这就叫作以随逐、触和安住来作意。这个含义,应当通过注释书里所说的跛者喻和守门人喻,以及《无碍解道》里所说的锯喻来理解。巴利
Tasmā anubandhanāya manasikarontena na ādimajjhapariyosānavasena manasikātabbaṃ. Apica kho phusanāvasena ca ṭhapanāvasena ca manasikātabbaṃ. Gaṇanānubandhanāvasena viya hi phusanāṭhapanāvasena visuṃ manasikāro natthi. Phuṭṭhaphuṭṭhaṭṭhāneyeva pana gaṇento gaṇanāya ca phusanāya ca manasi karoti. Tattheva gaṇanaṃ paṭisaṃharitvā te satiyā anubandhanto appanāvasena ca cittaṃ ṭhapento ‘‘anubandhanāya ca phusanāya ca ṭhapanāya ca manasi karotī’’ti vuccati. Svāyamattho aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttapaṅguḷadovārikopamāhi paṭisambhidāyaṃ vuttakakacopamāya ca veditabbo.
这里有一个跛脚人的比喻。就像有个跛脚的人,在母子俩荡秋千玩的时候,他把秋千推出去之后,就坐在秋千柱的底下,随着秋千板一次次荡过来、荡过去,他能看到秋千板的两头和中间,但他并不需要为了看到两头和中间而专门费力气。同样,这位比丘以念的力量安住在系缚所缘的柱子底下,把入出息当作秋千推出去之后,就安坐在那个相上,以念跟随每一次入出息在触点上经过的初、中、后,并把心安放在那里观见,但他并不需要为了看到这些而专门费力气。这就是跛脚人的比喻。巴利
Tatrāyaṃ paṅguḷopamā – ‘‘seyyathāpi paṅguḷo dolāya kīḷataṃ mātāputtānaṃ dolaṃ khipitvā tattheva dolatthambhamūle nisinno kamena āgacchantassa ca gacchantassa ca dolāphalakassa ubho koṭiyo majjhañca passati, na ca ubhokoṭimajjhānaṃ dassanatthaṃ byāvaṭo hoti. Evamevāyaṃ bhikkhu sativasena upanibandhanatthambhamūle ṭhatvā assāsapassāsadolaṃ khipitvā tattheva nimitte satiyā nisinno kamena āgacchantānañca gacchantānañca phuṭṭhaṭṭhāne assāsapassāsānaṃ ādimajjhapariyosānaṃ satiyā anugacchanto tattha ca cittaṃ ṭhapento passati, na ca tesaṃ dassanatthaṃ byāvaṭo hoti. Ayaṃ paṅguḷopamā.
这个则是守门人的比喻:就像守门人不会去盘查城内和城外的男人,问“你是谁?从哪里来?要去哪里?你手里拿着什么?”因为那些不是他的职责。他只盘查每一个来到门口的人。同样,这位比丘不会把已经进入体内的气息和已经呼出体外的气息当作职责,只有每一阵到达门口的气息才是他的职责。这就是守门人的比喻。巴利
Ayaṃ pana dovārikopamā – ‘‘seyyathāpi dovāriko nagarassa anto ca bahi ca purise ‘ko tvaṃ, kuto vā āgato, kuhiṃ vā gacchasi, kiṃ vā te hatthe’ti na vīmaṃsati, na hi tassa te bhārā. Dvārappattaṃ dvārappattaṃyeva pana vīmaṃsati; evameva imassa bhikkhuno anto paviṭṭhavātā ca bahi nikkhantavātā ca na bhārā honti, dvārappattā dvārappattāyeva bhārāti. Ayaṃ dovārikopamā.
不过,锯喻应当从一开始就这样理解。因为确实这样说过:巴利
Kakacopamā pana āditopabhuti evaṃ veditabbā. Vuttañhetaṃ –
相、入息、出息,非一心之所缘;
若不了知此三法,修习则不可得。
“ 相与入出息,非一心的所缘;
了知此三法,修习即得成。”巴利
‘‘Nimittaṃ assāsapassāsā, anārammaṇamekacittassa; Ajānato ca tayo dhamme, bhāvanānupalabbhati. ‘‘Nimittaṃ assāsapassāsā, anārammaṇamekacittassa; Jānato ca tayo dhamme, bhāvanā upalabbhatī’’ti. (paṭi. ma. 1.159);
这三法怎么就不是同一心的所缘了?这三法又并非不被知道,心怎么就不散乱了?而且精进显现出来,加行成就,证得殊胜?
就像一棵树被放在平坦的地面上,有人用锯子去锯它。那人靠着锯子碰到树的锯齿,正念现前;他不对来的锯齿或去的锯齿作意,来的或去的锯齿也不是不知道,精进显现出来,加行成就。巴利
Kathaṃ ime tayo dhammā ekacittassa ārammaṇaṃ na honti, na cime tayo dhammā aviditā honti, na ca cittaṃ vikkhepaṃ gacchati, padhānañca paññāyati, payogañca sādheti, visesamadhigacchati ? Seyyathāpi rukkho same bhūmibhāge nikkhitto, tamenaṃ puriso kakacena chindeyya, rukkhe phuṭṭhakakacadantānaṃ vasena purisassa sati upaṭṭhitā hoti, na āgate vā gate vā kakacadante manasi karoti, na āgatā vā gatā vā kakacadantā aviditā honti, padhānañca paññāyati, payogañca sādheti.
就像把一棵树放在平坦的地面上,这就是系缚所缘的相。就像锯齿,入出息也是如此。就像那人凭借接触树木的锯齿而保持正念现前,他不对来去的锯齿作意,而来去的锯齿也并非不被知道,此时精进显现出来,加行也得以成就;同样地,比丘把正念安立在鼻端或口相上而坐,他不对来去的入出息作意,而来去的入出息也并非不被知道,此时精进显现出来,加行也得以成就,殊胜也得以证得。巴利
Yathā rukkho same bhūmibhāge nikkhitto; evaṃ upanibandhananimittaṃ. Yathā kakacadantā; evaṃ assāsapassāsā. Yathā rukkhe phuṭṭhakakacadantānaṃ vasena purisassa sati upaṭṭhitā hoti, na āgate vā gate vā kakacadante manasi karoti, na āgatā vā gatā vā kakacadantā aviditā honti, padhānañca paññāyati, payogañca sādheti, evameva bhikkhu nāsikagge vā mukhanimitte vā satiṃ upaṭṭhapetvā nisinno hoti, na āgate vā gate vā assāsapassāse manasi karoti, na āgatā vā gatā vā assāsapassāsā aviditā honti, padhānañca paññāyati, payogañca sādheti, visesamadhigacchati.
什么是精进?对于已经发动精进的人来说,他的身和心都变得堪能做事——这就是精进。什么是加行?已经发动精进的人,各种杂染被断除,寻思被止息——这就是加行。什么是殊胜?已经发动精进的人,诸结被断除,随眠被彻底遣除——这就是殊胜。如此,这三法并不是同一颗心的所缘,而这三法也不是不被了知。心不散乱,精进得以显现,加行得以成就,殊胜得以证得。巴利
Padhānanti katamaṃ padhānaṃ? Āraddhavīriyassa kāyopi cittampi kammaniyaṃ hoti – idaṃ padhānaṃ. Katamo payogo? Āraddhavīriyassa upakkilesā pahīyanti, vitakkā vūpasammanti – ayaṃ payogo. Katamo viseso? Āraddhavīriyassa saṃyojanā pahīyanti, anusayā byantī honti – ayaṃ viseso. Evaṃ ime tayo dhammā ekacittassa ārammaṇā na honti, na cime tayo dhammā aviditā honti, na ca cittaṃ vikkhepaṃ gacchati, padhānañca paññāyati, payogañca sādheti, visesamadhigacchati.
“ 对于任何人来说,其入出息念已圆满,并且被很好地修习;
按次第修习成熟,就像佛陀所教导的那样。
他照亮了这个世界,就像月亮从云中脱出一样。”巴利
‘‘Ānāpānassatī yassa, paripuṇṇā subhāvitā; Anupubbaṃ paricitā, yathā buddhena desitā; So imaṃ lokaṃ pabhāseti, abbhā muttova candimā’’ti. (paṭi. ma. 1.160);
这就是锯喻。不过在这里应当知道,就来去而言,仅仅不作意即是其用处。这样修这个业处的人,有的人不久就生起禅相,并且成就了具备其余禅支的安止定,也就是所谓的安住。可是也有的人,从以计数方式作意的时候开始,随着粗重的入出息逐渐止息,身体粗重感平息下来,身心都变得轻快,身体就像要在空中跳起来一样。好比身体粗重的人坐在床或椅子上时,床椅会下陷、吱嘎作响,坐垫会起皱;而身体不粗重的人坐下去时,床椅不下陷、不吱嘎作响,坐垫也不起皱,床椅就像塞满了棉花一样。为什么呢?因为身体不粗重就是轻快的。同样地,从以计数方式作意的时候开始,随着粗重的入出息逐渐止息,身体粗重感平息下来,身心都变得轻快,身体就像要在空中跳起来一样。巴利
Ayaṃ kakacopamā. Idha panassa āgatāgatavasena amanasikāramattameva payojananti veditabbaṃ. Idaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ manasikaroto kassaci nacireneva nimittañca uppajjati, avasesajjhānaṅgapaṭimaṇḍitā appanāsaṅkhātā ṭhapanā ca sampajjati. Kassaci pana gaṇanāvaseneva manasikārakālatopabhuti anukkamato oḷārikaassāsapassāsanirodhavasena kāyadarathe vūpasante kāyopi cittampi lahukaṃ hoti, sarīraṃ ākāse laṅghanākārappattaṃ viya hoti. Yathā sāraddhakāyassa mañce vā pīṭhe vā nisīdato mañcapīṭhaṃ onamati, vikūjati, paccattharaṇaṃ valiṃ gaṇhāti. Asāraddhakāyassa pana nisīdato neva mañcapīṭhaṃ onamati, na vikūjati, na paccattharaṇaṃ valiṃ gaṇhāti, tūlapicupūritaṃ viya mañcapīṭhaṃ hoti. Kasmā? Yasmā asāraddho kāyo lahuko hoti; evameva gaṇanāvasena manasikārakālatopabhuti anukkamato oḷārikaassāsapassāsanirodhavasena kāyadarathe vūpasante kāyopi cittampi lahukaṃ hoti, sarīraṃ ākāse laṅghanākārappattaṃ viya hoti.
当他的粗显入出息停止后,心就以微细入出息的相为所缘而继续运作;当那个也停止后,心又接二连三地以更微细、更微细的相为所缘而继续运作。这是怎样的呢?就像一个人用大铁棒敲击铜锣,一击之下发出很大的声音,他的心就以粗显的声音为所缘而运作;当粗显的声音停止后,接着就以微细声音的相为所缘;当那个也停止后,心又接二连三地以更微细、更微细的声音的相为所缘而继续运作。应当这样理解。这也是曾经说过的——“譬如敲击铜锣时”等,详细解说见《无碍解道》(1.171)。巴利
Tassa oḷārike assāsapassāse niruddhe sukhumaassāsapassāsanimittārammaṇaṃ cittaṃ pavattati, tasmimpi niruddhe aparāparaṃ tato sukhumatarasukhumatamanimittārammaṇaṃ pavattatiyeva. Kathaṃ? Yathā puriso mahatiyā lohasalākāya kaṃsatāḷaṃ ākoṭeyya, ekappahārena mahāsaddo uppajjeyya, tassa oḷārikasaddārammaṇaṃ cittaṃ pavatteyya, niruddhe oḷārike sadde atha pacchā sukhumasaddanimittārammaṇaṃ, tasmimpi niruddhe aparāparaṃ tato sukhumatarasukhumatamasaddanimittārammaṇaṃ cittaṃ pavattateva; evanti veditabbaṃ. Vuttampi cetaṃ – ‘‘seyyathāpi kaṃse ākoṭite’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.171) vitthāro.
就像其他业处越往上修就越清晰,这个业处却不是这样。这个业处越往上修、越持续修习,反而变得越来越微细,甚至不再现起。当它这样不现起的时候,那位比丘不应该从座位上站起来,拍一拍皮垫就走。他该怎么做呢?他不应该想“我去问老师”或者“我的业处现在丢了”就起身离开,因为改变姿势走动的话,业处就会变得生疏。所以,应该就像还坐在原位时那样,从那个位置把它提起来。巴利
Yathā hi aññāni kammaṭṭhānāni uparūpari vibhūtāni honti, na tathā idaṃ. Idaṃ pana uparūpari bhāventassa bhāventassa sukhumattaṃ gacchati, upaṭṭhānampi na upagacchati. Evaṃ anupaṭṭhahante pana tasmiṃ na tena bhikkhunā uṭṭhāyāsanā cammakhaṇḍaṃ papphoṭetvā gantabbaṃ. Kiṃ kātabbaṃ? ‘‘Ācariyaṃ pucchissāmī’’ti vā ‘‘naṭṭhaṃ dāni me kammaṭṭhāna’’nti vā na vuṭṭhātabbaṃ, iriyāpathaṃ vikopetvā gacchato hi kammaṭṭhānaṃ navanavameva hoti. Tasmā yathānisinneneva desato āharitabbaṃ.
这里有个取回业处的方法。那位比丘知道业处不现起之后,应当这样思惟:“这些入出息,在哪里有?在哪里没有?对谁有?对谁没有?”这样思惟之后,知道“这些入出息在母胎里没有,沉入水中的人没有,同样,无想者、死者、入第四禅的人、具足色界无色界有的人、入灭尽定的人也没有”,然后就该这样自己提醒自己:“贤者,你又不是在母胎里,不是沉入水中,不是无想者,不是死者,不是入第四禅的人,不是具足色界无色界有的人,不是入灭尽定的人,你的入出息确实存在,只是因为智慧薄弱才把握不住罢了。”然后,他应当就依平常接触的地方把心安住下来,让作意继续运转。长鼻子的人,入出息触碰鼻端而运转;短鼻子的人,则触碰上唇。所以,他应当确立“它们触碰这个地方”这个相。世尊正是基于这个道理才说:“诸比丘,我不说失念、不正知的人能修习入出息念。”虽然任何业处都只有具念、正知的人才能成就,但其他业处对作意的人来说是明显的。而这个入出息念业处,是沉重、重大的修习,只有佛、独觉佛、佛弟子这些大丈夫才能以它为作意的境地,既不浅薄,也不是浅薄众生所能亲近的。越作意,它就越寂静、越微细。因此,在这里需要强而有力的念和慧。巴利
Tatrāyaṃ āharaṇūpāyo. Tena hi bhikkhunā kammaṭṭhānassa anupaṭṭhahanabhāvaṃ ñatvā iti paṭisañcikkhitabbaṃ – ‘‘ime assāsapassāsā nāma kattha atthi, kattha natthi, kassa vā atthi, kassa vā natthī’’ti. Athevaṃ paṭisañcikkhatā ‘‘ime antomātukucchiyaṃ natthi, udake nimuggānaṃ natthi, tathā asaññībhūtānaṃ matānaṃ catutthajjhānasamāpannānaṃ rūpārūpabhavasamaṅgīnaṃ nirodhasamāpannāna’’nti ñatvā evaṃ attanāva attā paṭicodetabbo – ‘‘nanu tvaṃ, paṇḍita, neva mātukucchigato, na udake nimuggo, na asaññībhūto, na mato, na catutthajjhānasamaāpanno, na rūpārūpabhavasamaṅgī, na nirodhasamāpanno, atthiyeva te assāsapassāsā, mandapaññatāya pana pariggahetuṃ na sakkosī’’ti. Athānena pakatiphuṭṭhavaseneva cittaṃ ṭhapetvā manasikāro pavattetabbo. Ime hi dīghanāsikassa nāsā puṭaṃ ghaṭṭentā pavattanti, rassanāsikassa uttaroṭṭhaṃ. Tasmānena imaṃ nāma ṭhānaṃ ghaṭṭentīti nimittaṃ paṭṭhapetabbaṃ. Imameva hi atthavasaṃ paṭicca vuttaṃ bhagavatā – ‘‘nāhaṃ, bhikkhave, muṭṭhassatissa asampajānassa ānāpānassatibhāvanaṃ vadāmī’’ti (ma. ni. 3.149; saṃ. ni. 5.992). Kiñcāpi hi yaṃkiñci kammaṭṭhānaṃ satassa sampajānasseva sampajjati, ito aññaṃ pana manasikarontassa pākaṭaṃ hoti. Idaṃ pana ānāpānassatikammaṭṭhānaṃ garukaṃ garukabhāvanaṃ buddhapaccekabuddhabuddhaputtānaṃ mahāpurisānameva manasikārabhūmibhūtaṃ, na ceva ittaraṃ, na ca ittarasattasamāsevitaṃ. Yathā yathā manasi karīyati, tathā tathā santañceva hoti sukhumañca. Tasmā ettha balavatī sati ca paññā ca icchitabbā.
就像缝制细软布料的时候,针要细,针孔要比针更细;同样,修习这个像细软布料一样的业处时,作为“针”的念,以及和它相应、像针孔一样的慧,也都要强而有力。而具足这样的念和慧的比丘,不应该在平常接触的部位之外去寻找那些入出息。巴利
Yathā hi maṭṭhasāṭakassa tunnakaraṇakāle sūcipi sukhumā icchitabbā, sūcipāsavedhanampi tato sukhumataraṃ; evameva maṭṭhasāṭakasadisassa imassa kammaṭṭhānassa bhāvanākāle sūcipaṭibhāgā satipi sūcipāsavedhanapaṭibhāgā taṃsampayuttā paññāpi balavatī icchitabbā. Tāhi ca pana satipaññāhi samannāgatena bhikkhunā na te assāsapassāsā aññatra pakatiphuṭṭhokāsā pariyesitabbā.
就像农夫耕完田以后,把耕牛解开,让它们朝牧场走去,自己坐在阴凉处休息。这时那些耕牛可能飞快地跑进森林。聪明的农夫想再把它们抓住套上轭,不会跟着它们的脚印在森林里到处乱转,而是拿起缰绳和刺棒,直接走到它们常下水的地方,坐下或躺下。等那些牛白天吃草走动之后,下到那个渡口,洗澡、喝水,上岸站着时,他看见了,就用缰绳把它们绑住,用刺棒赶着带回来,套上轭,继续干活。同样,那位比丘不应该在平常接触的部位之外去寻找入出息。他应该拿起念的缰绳和慧的刺棒,把心安放在平常接触的部位,让作意运转起来。当他这样作意时,不久那些入出息就会现起,就像牛在渡口一样。然后他用念的缰绳把它们绑住,就在那个地方把它们套上,用慧的刺棒驱策着,继续用功修行业处。当他这样用功时,不久相就会现起。不过这个相并不是每个人都一样。而且有些人说:它现起时,对某些人来说像是产生乐触的棉絮、木棉絮,或者像风吹过的气流。巴利
Yathā pana kassako kasiṃ kasitvā balibadde muñcitvā gocarābhimukhe katvā chāyāya nisinno vissameyya, athassa te balibaddā vegena aṭaviṃ paviseyyuṃ. Yo hoti cheko kassako so puna te gahetvā yojetukāmo na tesaṃ anupadaṃ gantvā aṭaviṃ āhiṇḍati. Atha kho rasmiñca patodañca gahetvā ujukameva tesaṃ nipātatitthaṃ gantvā nisīdati vā nipajjati vā. Atha te goṇe divasabhāgaṃ caritvā nipātatitthaṃ otaritvā nhatvā ca pivitvā ca paccuttaritvā ṭhite disvā rasmiyā bandhitvā patodena vijjhanto ānetvā yojetvā puna kammaṃ karoti; evameva tena bhikkhunā na te assāsapassāsā aññatra pakatiphuṭṭhokāsā pariyesitabbā. Satirasmiṃ pana paññāpatodañca gahetvā pakatiphuṭṭhokāse cittaṃ ṭhapetvā manasikāro pavattetabbo. Evañhissa manasikaroto nacirasseva te upaṭṭhahanti, nipātatitthe viya goṇā. Tato tena satirasmiyā bandhitvā tasmiṃyeva ṭhāne yojetvā paññāpatodena vijjhantena puna kammaṭṭhānaṃ anuyuñjitabbaṃ; tassevamanuyuñjato nacirasseva nimittaṃ upaṭṭhāti. Taṃ panetaṃ na sabbesaṃ ekasadisaṃ hoti ; apica kho kassaci sukhasamphassaṃ uppādayamāno tūlapicu viya, kappāsapicu viya, vātadhārā viya ca upaṭṭhātīti ekacce āhu.
不过,这是义注里的判定:这个相在有些人那里,会像星星,像宝珠,像珍珠球那样现起;在有些人那里,会像粗糙触感的棉籽,像心材做的针那样现起;在有些人那里,会像长长的花环绳,像花鬘,像烟焰那样现起;在有些人那里,会像展开的蜘蛛网,像云层,像莲花,像车轮,像月轮,像日轮那样现起。而且,当许多比丘诵习了经以后坐在一起,有一位比丘问“这部经在你们那里现起时是什么样子”,一个人说“在我这里,它像大山里的大河一样现起”,另一个人说“在我这里,像一片树林”,又一个人说“在我这里,像一棵有清凉树荫、枝叶茂盛、果实累累的树”。对他们来说,同一部经因为想的不同,就以不同的方式现起。同样,同一个业处也因为想的不同,就以不同的方式现起。应当知道,这是想所生、以想为因、从想而生,所以因为想的不同,就以不同的方式现起。巴利
Ayaṃ pana aṭṭhakathāvinicchayo – idañhi kassaci tārakarūpaṃ viya, maṇiguḷikā viya, muttāguḷikā viya ca kassaci kharasamphassaṃ hutvā kappāsaṭṭhi viya, sāradārusūci viya ca kassaci dīghapāmaṅgasuttaṃ viya, kusumadāmaṃ viya, dhūmasikhā viya ca kassaci vitthata makkaṭakasuttaṃ viya, valāhakapaṭalaṃ viya, padumapupphaṃ viya, rathacakkaṃ viya, candamaṇḍalaṃ viya, sūriyamaṇḍalaṃ viya ca upaṭṭhāti. Tañca panetaṃ yathā sambahulesu bhikkhūsu suttantaṃ sajjhāyitvā nisinnesu ekena bhikkhunā ‘‘tumhākaṃ kīdisaṃ hutvā idaṃ suttaṃ upaṭṭhātī’’ti vutte eko ‘‘mayhaṃ mahatī pabbateyyā nadī viya hutvā upaṭṭhātī’’ti āha. Aparo ‘‘mayhaṃ ekā vanarāji viya’’. Añño ‘‘mayhaṃ sītacchāyo sākhāsampanno phalabhārabharitarukkho viyā’’ti. Tesañhi taṃ ekameva suttaṃ saññānānatāya nānato upaṭṭhāti. Evaṃ ekameva kammaṭṭhānaṃ saññānānatāya nānato upaṭṭhāti. Saññajañhi etaṃ saññānidānaṃ saññāppabhavaṃ tasmā saññānānatāya nānato upaṭṭhātīti veditabbaṃ.
在这里,以入息为所缘的心是一回事,以出息为所缘的心是另一回事,以相为所缘的心又是另一回事。如果一个人不具备这三种法,他的业处既达不到安止,也达不到近行。如果一个人具备这三种法,他的业处才能达到安止和近行。确实是这样说的:巴利
Ettha ca aññameva assāsārammaṇaṃ cittaṃ, aññaṃ passāsārammaṇaṃ, aññaṃ nimittārammaṇaṃ yassa hi ime tayo dhammā natthi, tassa kammaṭṭhānaṃ neva appanaṃ na upacāraṃ pāpuṇāti. Yassa panime tayo dhammā atthi, tasseva kammaṭṭhānaṃ appanañca upacārañca pāpuṇāti. Vuttañhetaṃ –
相与入出息,不是单一心识的所缘;
若不了知此三法,修习即不可得。
“ 相与入息出息,非一心之所缘;
了知此三法者,修习乃得现前。”巴利
‘‘Nimittaṃ assāsapassāsā, anārammaṇamekacittassa; Ajānato ca tayo dhamme, bhāvanānupalabbhati. ‘‘Nimittaṃ assāsapassāsā, anārammaṇamekacittassa; Jānato ca tayo dhamme, bhāvanā upalabbhatī’’ti. (visuddhi. 1.231);
当相这样现起时,那位比丘应当前往导师那里报告:“尊者,我现起了这样的。”导师不应当说“这是相”或“这不是相”,而应当说“是这样,贤友”,然后嘱咐他“要反复作意”。因为如果说“这是相”,他就会懈怠;如果说“这不是相”,他就会失望沮丧。所以,这两种话都不说,只应当督促他作意。这是长部诵师的主张。中部诵师则说:“贤友,这是相,是业处,要反复作意,善男子。”应当这样说。然后,他应当把心只安放在相上。从此以后,他就以这种安放的方式修行。古人确实这样说过:巴利
Evaṃ upaṭṭhite pana nimitte tena bhikkhunā ācariyasantikaṃ gantvā ārocetabbaṃ – ‘‘mayhaṃ, bhante, evarūpaṃ nāma upaṭṭhātī’’ti. Ācariyena pana ‘‘etaṃ nimitta’’nti vā ‘‘na nimitta’’nti vā na vattabbaṃ. ‘‘Evaṃ hoti, āvuso’’ti vatvā pana ‘‘punappunaṃ manasi karohī’’ti vattabbo. ‘‘Nimitta’’nti hi vutte vosānaṃ āpajjeyya; ‘‘na nimitta’’nti vutte nirāso visīdeyya. Tasmā tadubhayampi avatvā manasikāreyeva niyojetabboti. Evaṃ tāva dīghabhāṇakā. Majjhimabhāṇakā panāhu – ‘‘nimittamidaṃ, āvuso, kammaṭṭhānaṃ punappunaṃ manasi karohi sappurisāti vattabbo’’ti. Athānena nimitteyeva cittaṃ ṭhapetabbaṃ. Evamassāyaṃ ito pabhuti ṭhapanāvasena bhāvanā hoti. Vuttañhetaṃ porāṇehi –
“ 把心安住在相上,让各种行相清晰显现;
智者将自己的心系于入息和出息。”巴利
‘‘Nimitte ṭhapayaṃ cittaṃ, nānākāraṃ vibhāvayaṃ; Dhīro assāsapassāse, sakaṃ cittaṃ nibandhatī’’ti. (visuddhi. 1.232; paṭi. ma. aṭṭha. 2.1.163);
从那个相开始现起之后,五盖就被镇伏了,烦恼也平息了,正念也现前了,心也定了。这里说的心定其实有两种情况:在近行地,是因为断除了五盖而心定;在安止地,是因为禅支显现而心定。其中,“近行地”就是近行定,“安止地”就是安止定。这两者有什么区别呢?近行定在善速行路运行之后,会落入有分;安止定则是,如果有人白天坐下来入定,他整个白天都在善速行路中运行,不会落入有分。在这两种定当中,因为相显现而让心得定的,是近行定。这时候,他不应该从颜色等方面去注意那个相,也不应该从特相方面去观察它。他应该像刹帝利大王后守护转轮王的胎一样,像农夫守护稻谷的穗一样,以不放逸的心来守护这个相;守护好了,它就会带来果报。巴利
Tassevaṃ nimittupaṭṭhānato pabhuti nīvaraṇāni vikkhambhitāneva honti kilesā sannisinnāva sati upaṭṭhitāyeva, cittaṃ samāhitameva. Idañhi dvīhākārehi cittaṃ samāhitaṃ nāma hohi – upacārabhūmiyaṃ vā nīvaraṇappahānena, paṭilābhabhūmiyaṃ vā aṅgapātubhāvena. Tattha ‘‘upacārabhūmī’’ti upacārasamādhi; ‘‘paṭilābhabhūmī’’ti appanāsamādhi. Tesaṃ kiṃ nānākaraṇaṃ? Upacārasamādhi kusalavīthiyaṃ javitvā bhavaṅgaṃ otarati, appanāsamādhi divasabhāge appetvā nisinnassa divasabhāgampi kusalavīthiyaṃ javati, na bhavaṅgaṃ otarati. Imesu dvīsu samādhīsu nimittapātubhāvena upacārasamādhinā samāhitaṃ cittaṃ hoti . Athānena taṃ nimittaṃ neva vaṇṇato manasikātabbaṃ, na lakkhaṇato paccavekkhitabbaṃ. Apica kho khattiyamahesiyā cakkavattigabbho viya kassakena sāliyavagabbho viya ca appamattena rakkhitabbaṃ; rakkhitaṃ hissa phaladaṃ hoti.
“ 守护好所得的相,就不会有退失。
没有守护的时候,得到多少就失去多少。”巴利
‘‘Nimittaṃ rakkhato laddha, parihāni na vijjati; Ārakkhamhi asantamhi, laddhaṃ laddhaṃ vinassatī’’ti.
在这里,守护的方法是:那位比丘要避开七种不适合的东西——住处、行境、谈话、人、食物、季节、威仪路,只受用这七种适合的,然后反复对那个相作意。巴利
Tatrāyaṃ rakkhaṇūpāyo – tena bhikkhunā āvāso, gocaro, bhassaṃ, puggalo, bhojanaṃ, utu, iriyāpathoti imāni satta asappāyāni vajjetvā tāneva satta sappāyāni sevantena punappunaṃ taṃ nimittaṃ manasikātabbaṃ.
如此,依靠适合的所缘,使相稳固,令其增长、壮大之后,就应当不间断地修习这十种安止善巧:使依处清净,使诸根平衡,于相善巧;心应策励时即策励心,心应抑制时即抑制心,心应欢喜时即令心欢喜,心应舍置时即舍置心;远离未得定之人,亲近已得定之人,倾向于此。巴利
Evaṃ sappāyasevanena nimittaṃ thiraṃ katvā vuḍḍhiṃ virūḷhiṃ gamayitvā vatthuvisadakiriyā, indriyasamattapaṭipādanatā, nimittakusalatā, yasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ sapaggahetabba tasmiṃ samaye cittapaggaṇhanā, yasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ niggahetabbaṃ tasmiṃ samaye cittaniggaṇhanā, yasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ sampahaṃsetabbaṃ tasmiṃ samaye sampahaṃsetabbaṃ tasmiṃ samaye cittasampahaṃsanā, yasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ ajjhupekkhitabbaṃ tasmiṃ samaye cittaajjhupekkhanā, asamāhitapuggalaparivajjanā, samāhitapuggalasevanā, tadadhimuttatāti imāni dasa appanākosallāni avijahantena yogo karaṇīyo.
他这样精勤而住的时候,心想“现在安止就要生起了”,于是截断有分,以相为所缘的意门转向生起。当这个转向灭去后,执取同一个所缘,生起四个或五个速行心:其中第一个是遍作,第二个是近行,第三个是随顺,第四个是种姓,第五个是安止心。或者说,第一个既是遍作也是近行,第二个是随顺,第三个是种姓,第四个是安止心。只有第四个或第五个速行心进入安止,不会是第六个或第七个,因为已经靠近落入有分之故。巴利
Tassevaṃ anuyuttassa viharato idāni appanā uppajjissatīti bhavaṅgaṃ vicchinditvā nimittārammaṇaṃ manodvārāvajjanaṃ uppajjati. Tasmiñca niruddhe tadevārammaṇaṃ gahetvā cattāri pañca vā javanāni, yesaṃ paṭhamaṃ parikammaṃ, dutiyaṃ upacāraṃ, tatiyaṃ anulomaṃ, catutthaṃ gotrabhu , pañcamaṃ appanācittaṃ. Paṭhamaṃ vā parikammañceva upacārañca, dutiyaṃ anulomaṃ, tatiyaṃ gotrabhu, catutthaṃ appanācittanti vuccati. Catutthameva hi pañcamaṃ vā appeti, na chaṭṭhaṃ sattamaṃ vā āsannabhavaṅgapātattā.
不过,阿毗达摩论师瞿达多长老说:“由于习行缘,善法变得强有力,所以第六或第七速行心能进入安止。”这种说法在注释书中已被否定。在这里,前分心属于欲界,而安止心则属于色界。这样一来,他就舍弃了五支,具备了五支,成就了十种相,具足三种善,证得了初禅。他在同一个所缘上止息了寻等,进而达到第二、第三、第四禅。到此为止,以安住的方式,他的修行已经达到了终点。这是这里的简要说明。如果想了解详细内容,则应当从《清净道论》中获取。巴利
Ābhidhammikagodattatthero panāha – ‘‘āsevanapaccayena kusalā dhammā balavanto honti; tasmā chaṭṭhaṃ sattamaṃ vā appetī’’ti. Taṃ aṭṭhakathāsu paṭikkhittaṃ. Tattha pubbabhāgacittāni kāmāvacarāni honti, appanācittaṃ pana rūpāvacaraṃ. Evamanena pañcaṅgavippahīnaṃ, pañcaṅgasamannāgataṃ, dasalakkhaṇasampannaṃ, tividhakalyāṇaṃ, paṭhamajjhānaṃ adhigataṃ hoti. So tasmiṃyevārammaṇe vitakkādayo vūpasametvā dutiyatatiyacatutthajjhānāni pāpuṇāti. Ettāvatā ca ṭhapanāvasena bhāvanāya pariyosānappatto hoti. Ayamettha saṅkhepakathā. Vitthāro pana icchantena visuddhimaggato gahetabbo.
这样,已经证得第四禅的比丘,如果想通过简择和回转的方式增长业处、达到清净,就先以转向、入定、决意、出定、观察这五种方式,让这个禅那达到自在和熟练。然后,他把握色与非色——也就是“以非色为先导的色,或以色为先导的非色”——并开始修观。怎么修呢?他从禅那出定后,把握禅支,看到它们所依止的心所依处,以及依止于心所依处的诸界,还有这一切所依的整个业生身。接着他确定:“禅支是非色,所依处等是色”,这样来分别色与非色。巴利
Evaṃ pattacatutthajjhāno panettha bhikkhu sallakkhaṇāvivaṭṭanāvasena kammaṭṭhānaṃ vaḍḍhetvā pārisuddhiṃ pattukāmo tadeva jhānaṃ āvajjanasamāpajjanaadhiṭṭhānavuṭṭhānapaccavekkhaṇasaṅkhātehi pañcahākārehi vasippattaṃ paguṇaṃ katvā arūpapubbaṅgamaṃ vā rūpaṃ, rūpapubbaṅgamaṃ vā arūpanti rūpārūpaṃ pariggahetvā vipassanaṃ paṭṭhapeti. Kathaṃ? So hi jhānā vuṭṭhahitvā jhānaṅgāni pariggahetvā tesaṃ nissayaṃ hadayavatthuṃ taṃ nissayāni ca bhūtāni tesañca nissayaṃ sakalampi karajakāyaṃ passati. Tato ‘‘jhānaṅgāni arūpaṃ, vatthādīni rūpa’’nti rūpārūpaṃ vavatthapeti.
或者,他从定中出来后,在头发等身体各部分,按地界等的方式,把握四大种以及依靠它们的色法。然后他观察到识:这个识要么以刚才把握的色法为所缘,要么以刚才把握的色法为依处和门,并且与相应的心所一起生起。接着他确定:“四大种等是色,与相应法俱起的识是无色。”巴利
Atha vā samāpattito vuṭṭhahitvā kesādīsu koṭṭhāsesu pathavīdhātuādivasena cattāri bhūtāni taṃnissitarūpāni ca pariggahetvā yathāpariggahitarūpārammaṇaṃ yathāpariggahitarūpavatthudvārārammaṇaṃ vā sasampayuttadhammaṃ viññāṇañca passati. Tato ‘‘bhūtādīni rūpaṃ sasampayuttadhammaṃ viññāṇaṃ arūpa’’nti vavatthapeti.
或者,他从定中出来后,观察呼吸的生起即是业所生的身体和心。就像铁匠鼓动风箱时,风要依靠皮囊以及人的相应努力才能流动;同样,呼吸也要依靠身体和心才能生起。然后他判定:呼吸和身体是色,心以及和心相应的法是名。巴利
Atha vā samāpattito vuṭṭhahitvā assāsapassāsānaṃ samudayo karajakāyo ca cittañcāti passati. Yathā hi kammāragaggariyā dhamamānāya bhastañca purisassa ca tajjaṃ vāyāmaṃ paṭicca vāto sañcarati; evameva kāyañca cittañca paṭicca assāsapassāsāti. Tato assāsapassāse ca kāyañca rūpaṃ, cittañca taṃsampayuttadhamme ca arūpanti vavatthapeti.
这样确定了名色之后,他再去寻找名色的因缘。在寻找的过程中,他看到了名色的因缘,于是对三世名色流转的疑惑就消除了。疑惑消除后,他以聚团观察的方式,将三相安立在诸行上,在生灭随观的前分阶段,舍弃了光明等十种观染,确定远离观染的修行之道为“道”,舍弃对生起的执取,到达坏灭随观。当一切诸行以怖畏的样貌呈现时,他通过不间断的坏灭随观,厌离、离染、解脱,依次证得四圣道,安住在阿拉汉果上,达到十九种观察智的终极,成为包括天界在内的一切世间最上的应供者。到此为止,从数息开始,直到观修结束,他的入出息念定修习就算完成了。巴利
Evaṃ nāmarūpaṃ vavatthapetvā tassa paccayaṃ pariyesati, pariyesanto ca taṃ disvā tīsupi addhāsu nāmarūpassa pavattiṃ ārabbha kaṅkhaṃ vitarati. Vitiṇṇakaṅkho kalāpasammasanavasena tilakkhaṇaṃ āropetvā udayabbayānupassanāya pubbabhāge uppanne obhāsādayo dasa vipassanupakkilese pahāya upakkilesavimuttaṃ paṭipadāñāṇaṃ ‘‘maggo’’ti vavatthapetvā udayaṃ pahāya bhaṅgānupassanaṃ patvā nirantaraṃ bhaṅgānupassanena bhayato upaṭṭhitesu sabbasaṅkhāresu nibbindanto virajjanto vimuccanto yathākkamaṃ cattāro ariyamagge pāpuṇitvā arahattaphale patiṭṭhāya ekūnavīsatibhedassa paccavekkhaṇañāṇassa pariyantappatto sadevakassa lokassa aggadakkhiṇeyyo hoti. Ettāvatā cassa gaṇanaṃ ādiṃ katvā vipassanāpariyosānā ānāpānassatisamādhibhāvanā ca samattā hotīti.
但在其余三个四法组中,因为并没有各别不同的业处修习方法,所以它们的含义应当依照逐句注释的方式来了知。“觉知喜”:就是使喜被感受、被了知,而修习“我将入息、我将出息”。其中,喜以两种方式被感受:依所缘,以及依不痴。巴利
Itaresu pana tīsu catukkesu yasmā visuṃ kammaṭṭhānabhāvanānayo nāma natthi; tasmā anupadavaṇṇanānayeneva nesaṃ attho veditabbo. Pītippaṭisaṃvedīti pītiṃ paṭisaṃviditaṃ karonto pākaṭaṃ karonto assasissāmi passasissāmīti sikkhati. Tattha dvīhākārehi pīti paṭisaṃviditā hoti – ārammaṇato ca asammohato ca.
喜是如何通过所缘而被体验到的?他进入带有喜的两种禅那,在他入定的那一刹那,由于获得禅那,喜就通过所缘而被体验到,因为所缘被清楚地觉知了。巴利
Kathaṃ ārammaṇato pīti paṭisaṃviditā hoti? Sappītike dve jhāne samāpajjati, tassa samāpattikkhaṇe jhānapaṭilābhena ārammaṇato pīti paṭisaṃviditā hoti ārammaṇassa paṭisaṃviditattā.
怎样才是以不痴的方式(了知喜)?他进入具有喜的两种禅那,出定之后,以灭尽、坏灭的方式随观与禅那相应的喜。在他修观的刹那,通过通达特相,喜就以不痴的方式被清楚地了知。这在《无碍解道》中已经说过:巴利
Kathaṃ asammohato? Sappītike dve jhāne samāpajjitvā vuṭṭhāya jhānasampayuttakapītiṃ khayato vayato sammasati, tassa vipassanākkhaṇe lakkhaṇapaṭivedhena asammohato pīti paṭisaṃviditā hoti. Vuttañhetaṃ paṭisambhidāyaṃ –
以长入息而了知心一境性、不散乱时,念已现前。以那念、那智,他感受那喜。以长出息……中略……以短入息……以短出息……以觉知全身而入息……以觉知全身而出息……以平静身行而入息……以平静身行而出息,了知心一境性、不散乱时,念已现前;以那念、那智,他感受那喜。当转向时,他感受那喜;当了知时……当观察时……当省察时……当决意于心时……当以信胜解时……当策励精进时……当现起念时……当令心等持时……当以慧了知时……当证知应证知时……当遍知应遍知时……当断除应断除时……当修习应修习时……当现证应现证时,他感受那喜。如此,那喜被感受。巴利
‘‘Dīghaṃ assāsavasena cittassa ekaggataṃ avikkhepaṃ pajānato sati upaṭṭhitā hoti. Tāya satiyā tena ñāṇena sā pīti paṭisaṃviditā hoti. Dīghaṃ passāsavasena…pe… rassaṃ assāsavasena… rassaṃ passāsavasena… sabbakāyappaṭisaṃvedī assāsavasena… sabbakāyappaṭisaṃvedī passāsavasena… passambhayaṃ kāyasaṅkhāraṃ assāsavasena… passambhayaṃ kāyasaṅkhāraṃ passāsavasena cittassa ekaggataṃ avikkhepaṃ pajānato sati upaṭṭhitā hoti, tāya satiyā tena ñāṇena sā pīti paṭisaṃviditā hoti. Āvajjato sā pīti paṭisaṃviditā hoti jānato… passato… paccavekkhato… cittaṃ adhiṭṭhahato… saddhāya adhimuccato… vīriyaṃ paggaṇhato… satiṃ upaṭṭhāpayato… cittaṃ samādahato… paññāya pajānato… abhiññeyyaṃ abhijānato… pariññeyyaṃ parijānato… pahātabbaṃ pajahato… bhāvetabbaṃ bhāvayato… sacchikātabbaṃ sacchikaroto sā pīti paṭisaṃviditā hoti. Evaṃ sā pīti paṭisaṃviditā hotī’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.172).
按照同样的方法,其余各句也应该从含义上理解。不过这里有一些特别的差别:应当知道,依三种禅那而感受乐,依四种禅那而感受心行。所谓“心行”,指的是受和想这两个蕴。在这里,关于感受乐这一句,为了显示观照的层面,《无碍解道》中说:“乐有两种——身乐和心乐。”令心行轻安的意思是:使粗重的心行渐渐轻安,让它止息。这应该按照身行部分所讲的方式详细理解。另外,在这里的喜句中,是以喜为首来说受;在乐句中,是直接就受本身来说;在两个心行句中,根据“想和受这些心所法,系属于心,是心行”的说法,指的是与想相应的受。应当知道,这一组四法是以受随观的方式来说的。巴利
Eteneva nayena avasesapadānipi atthato veditabbāni. Idaṃ panettha visesamattaṃ. Tiṇṇaṃ jhānānaṃ vasena sukhapaṭisaṃveditā catunnampi vasena cittasaṅkhārapaṭisaṃveditā veditabbā. ‘‘Cittasaṅkhāro’’ti vedanādayo dve khandhā. Sukhappaṭisaṃvedipade cettha vipassanābhūmidassanatthaṃ ‘‘sukhanti dve sukhāni – kāyikañca sukhaṃ cetasikañcā’’ti paṭisambhidāyaṃ vuttaṃ. Passambhayaṃ cittasaṅkhāranti oḷārikaṃ oḷārikaṃ cittasaṅkhāraṃ passambhento, nirodhentoti attho. So vitthārato kāyasaṅkhāre vuttanayeneva veditabbo. Apicettha pītipade pītisīsena vedanā vuttā. Sukhapade sarūpeneva vedanā . Dvīsu cittasaṅkhārapadesu ‘‘saññā ca vedanā ca cetasikā ete dhammā cittapaṭibaddhā cittasaṅkhārā’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.174; ma. ni. 1.463) vacanato saññāsampayuttā vedanāti. Evaṃ vedanānupassanānayena idaṃ catukkaṃ bhāsitanti veditabbaṃ.
在第三个四法组里,也应该知道:是依四种禅那来感受心的。所谓“令心喜悦”,就是让心喜悦、欢喜、欢悦、极其欢悦,同时修学“我将入息,我将出息”。在这里,喜悦有两种方式——依靠定和依靠观。巴利
Tatiyacatukkepi catunnaṃ jhānānaṃ vasena cittapaṭisaṃveditā veditabbā. Abhippamodayaṃ cittanti cittaṃ modento pamodento hāsento pahāsento assasissāmi passasissāmīti sikkhati. Tattha dvīhākārehi abhippamodo hoti – samādhivasena ca vipassanāvasena ca.
怎样依定力来修?他进入两种有喜的禅那,在入定的那一刻,以与定相应的喜让心喜悦、欢欣。怎样依观力来修?进入两种有喜的禅那后出定,以灭尽、衰坏的方式随观与禅那相应的喜;在观的那一刻,以与禅那相应的喜为所缘,让心喜悦、欢欣。这样修行的人,就称为在学“令心喜悦,我将出息,我将入息”。巴利
Kathaṃ samādhivasena? Sappītike dve jhāne samāpajjati, so samāpattikkhaṇe sampayuttāya pītiyā cittaṃ āmodeti pamodeti. Kathaṃ vipassanāvasena? Sappītike dve jhāne samāpajjitvā vuṭṭhāya jhānasampayuttakapītiṃ khayato vayato sammasati; evaṃ vipassanākkhaṇe jhānasampayuttakapītiṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā cittaṃ āmodeti pamodeti. Evaṃ paṭipanno ‘‘abhippamodayaṃ cittaṃ assasissāmi passasissāmīti sikkhatī’’ti vuccati.
让心专注,是指:依靠初禅等,把心平稳地安放在所缘上、稳稳地保持在所缘上;或者,进入那些禅那之后出定,对与禅那相应的心,从坏灭、消散的角度去观察,在观照的刹那,通过通达诸法之相,生起刹那的心一境性;依靠这样生起的刹那心一境性,同样把心平稳地安放在所缘上、稳稳地保持在所缘上,这就叫作学“让心专注,我将出息,我将入息”。巴利
Samādahaṃ cittanti paṭhamajjhānādivasena ārammaṇe cittaṃ samaṃ ādahanto samaṃ ṭhapento tāni vā pana jhānāni samāpajjitvā vuṭṭhāya jhānasampayuttakacittaṃ khayato vayato sammasato vipassanākkhaṇe lakkhaṇapaṭivedhena uppajjati khaṇikacittekaggatā; evaṃ uppannāya khaṇikacittekaggatāya vasenapi ārammaṇe cittaṃ samaṃ ādahanto samaṃ ṭhapento ‘‘samādahaṃ cittaṃ assasissāmi passasissāmīti sikkhatī’’ti vuccati.
让心解脱:以初禅让心从诸盖中解脱、释放;以第二禅让心从寻与伺中解脱、释放;以第三禅让心从喜中解脱、释放;以第四禅让心从乐与苦中解脱、释放。或者,进入这些禅那后出定,以坏灭、衰灭的方式观察与禅那相应的心。他在观照的刹那,以无常随观让心从常想中解脱、释放;以苦随观让心从乐想中解脱、释放;以无我随观让心从我想中解脱、释放;以厌离随观让心从欢喜中解脱、释放;以离欲随观让心从贪欲中解脱、释放;以灭尽随观让心从集起中解脱、释放;以弃舍随观让心从执取中解脱、释放,同时出息、入息。因此说:学“让心解脱,我将出息、我将入息”。应当知道,这个四法组是依心随观而说的。巴利
Vimocayaṃ cittanti paṭhamajjhānena nīvaraṇehi cittaṃ mocento vimocento, dutiyena vitakkavicārehi, tatiyena pītiyā, catutthena sukhadukkhehi cittaṃ mocento vimocento. Tāni vā pana jhānāni samāpajjitvā vuṭṭhāya jhānasampayuttakacittaṃ khayato vayato sammasati. So vipassanākkhaṇe aniccānupassanāya niccasaññāto cittaṃ mocento vimocento, dukkhānupassanāya sukhasaññāto, anattānupassanāya attasaññāto, nibbidānupassanāya nandito, virāgānupassanāya rāgato, nirodhānupassanāya samudayato, paṭinissaggānupassanāya ādānato cittaṃ mocento vimocento assasati ceva passasati ca. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘vimocayaṃ cittaṃ assasissāmi passasissāmīti sikkhatī’’ti. Evaṃ cittānupassanāvasena idaṃ catukkaṃ bhāsitanti veditabbaṃ.
在第四个四法组里,说到“随观无常者”时,这里首先应当了解无常,应当了解无常性,应当了解无常随观,应当了解无常随观者。其中,“无常”指的是五蕴。为什么?因为它们有生起、坏灭和变易的性质。“无常性”指的是这些五蕴的生起、坏灭和变易,或者已生起的事物生已而无有,或者已生起的事物不能以那种方式保持,以刹那坏灭的方式毁坏。“无常随观”是指依那个无常性,在色等诸法上观察为“无常”。“无常随观者”是指具备那种随观的人。因此,这样的人在出息和入息时,在这里应当理解为“作为无常随观者,他学:‘我将出息,我将入息。’”巴利
Catutthacatukke pana aniccānupassīti ettha tāva aniccaṃ veditabbaṃ, aniccatā veditabbā, aniccānupassanā veditabbā , aniccānupassī veditabbo. Tattha ‘‘anicca’’nti pañcakkhandhā. Kasmā? Uppādavayaññathattabhāvā. ‘‘Aniccatā’’ti tesaññeva uppādavayaññathattaṃ hutvā abhāvo vā nibbattānaṃ tenevākārena aṭhatvā khaṇabhaṅgena bhedoti attho. ‘‘Aniccānupassanā’’ti tassā aniccatāya vasena rūpādīsu ‘‘anicca’’nti anupassanā; ‘‘aniccānupassī’’ti tāya anupassanāya samannāgato; tasmā evaṃ bhūto assasanto ca passasanto ca idha ‘‘aniccānupassī assasissāmi, passasissāmīti sikkhatī’’ti veditabbo.
对于“离贪随观”这句,这里有两种离贪:灭尽离贪和究竟离贪。其中,“灭尽离贪”是指诸行的刹那坏灭;“究竟离贪”是指涅槃。“离贪随观”是指以照见这两者为所缘而现起的观与道。应当知道,具足这两种随观之后,在出息和入息时,就是在修学“我作为离贪随观者,将出息,将入息”。在“灭尽随观”这一句上,也是同样的道理。巴利
Virāgānupassīti ettha pana dve virāgā – khayavirāgo ca accantavirāgo ca. Tattha ‘‘khayavirāgo’’ti saṅkhārānaṃ khaṇabhaṅgo; ‘‘accantavirāgo’’ti nibbānaṃ; ‘‘virāgānupassanā’’ti tadubhayadassanavasena pavattā vipassanā ca maggo ca. Tāya duvidhāyapi anupassanāya samannāgato hutvā assasanto ca passasanto ca ‘‘virāgānupassī assasissāmi passasissāmīti sikkhatī’’ti veditabbo. Nirodhānupassīpadepi eseva nayo.
“随观弃舍”这里也有两种弃舍:舍弃弃舍和趣入弃舍。弃舍本身就是随观,所以叫弃舍随观;这是观和道的别名。观以彼分断的方式,连同蕴行一起舍弃烦恼,又因为见到有为法的过患,而倾向于其对立面的涅槃,所以称为舍弃弃舍和趣入弃舍。道以正断的方式,连同蕴行一起舍弃烦恼,又以涅槃为所缘而跃入其中,所以称为舍弃弃舍和趣入弃舍。不过,这两者都是因为随顺观照前前诸智,所以叫随观。具足这两种弃舍随观而出息、入息的人,应当知道就是修习“作为舍遣随观者,我将出息,我将入息”。这样修习,就是以十六种方式修习。其余部分和前面所说的一样。巴利
Paṭinissaggānupassīti etthāpi dve paṭinissaggā – pariccāgapaṭinissaggo ca pakkhandanapaṭinissaggo ca. Paṭinissaggoyeva anupassanā paṭinissaggānupassanā; vipassanāmaggānametaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Vipassanā hi tadaṅgavasena saddhiṃ khandhābhisaṅkhārehi kilese pariccajati, saṅkhatadosadassanena ca tabbiparīte nibbāne tanninnatāya pakkhandatīti pariccāgapaṭinissaggo ceva pakkhandanapaṭinissaggo cāti vuccati. Maggo samucchedavasena saddhiṃ khandhābhisaṅkhārehi kilese pariccajati, ārammaṇakaraṇena ca nibbāne pakkhandatīti pariccāgapaṭinissaggo ceva pakkhandanapaṭinissago cāti vuccati. Ubhayampi pana purimapurimañāṇānaṃ anuanu passanato anupassanāti vuccati. Tāya duvidhāya paṭinissaggānupassanāya samannāgato hutvā assasanto ca passasanto ca paṭinisaggānupassī assasissāmi passasissāmīti sikkhatīti veditabbo. Evaṃ bhāvitoti evaṃ soḷasahi ākārehi bhāvito. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.
167 至于“那时,世尊”等语的开头处,简略含义是这样:世尊这样用入出息念定的讲说让比丘们安顿下来之后,接着,第三巴拉基格制戒的因缘和事由——比丘们互相夺命——已经发生。针对这个因缘、这个事由,世尊召集比丘僧团,询问并呵责之后,因为其中自己夺自己生命以及通过鹿杖外道使人夺命的情况不构成巴拉基格事,所以把那些搁置一旁,只取构成巴拉基格的互相夺命一事,制定巴拉基格戒,说“若比丘故意夺取人命……”等语。不过,因为这里有圣者混杂其中,所以不说“愚痴人”,而说“那些比丘”。巴利
167.Athakho bhagavātiādimhi pana ayaṃ saṅkhepattho. Evaṃ bhagavā ānāpānassatisamādhikathāya bhikkhū samassāsetvā atha yaṃ taṃ tatiyapārājikapaññattiyā nidānañceva pakaraṇañca uppannaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ aññamaññaṃ jīvitā voropanaṃ, etasmiṃ nidāne etasmiṃ pakaraṇe bhikkhusaṅghaṃ sannipātetvā paṭipucchitvā vigarahitvā ca yasmā tattha attanā attānaṃ jīvitā voropanaṃ migalaṇḍikena ca voropāpanaṃ pārājikavatthu na hoti; tasmā taṃ ṭhapetvā pārājikassa vatthubhūtaṃ aññamaññaṃ jīvitā voropanameva gahetvā pārājikaṃ paññapento ‘‘yo pana bhikkhu sañcicca manussaviggaha’’ntiādimāha. Ariyapuggalamissakattā panettha ‘‘moghapurisā’’ti avatvā ‘‘te bhikkhū’’ti vuttaṃ.
这样以从根本上断除的方式加以确立之后,在第三条巴拉基格已经制定之后,为了另外再制定戒条,又出现了赞叹死亡、称扬死亡的事例。为了显示这件事的出现,才说了“这件事对世尊来说如此……”等等。巴利
Evaṃ mūlacchejjavasena daḷhaṃ katvā tatiyapārājike paññatte aparampi anupaññattatthāya maraṇavaṇṇasaṃvaṇṇanavatthu udapādi, tassuppattidīpanatthaṃ ‘‘evañcidaṃ bhagavatā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
168 168. 其中,“心被系缚”是指心被欲贪所系缚,也就是染着、有所期待的意思。“我们赞叹死亡、称扬死亡”是指:先指出生命中的过患,再赞叹死亡的功德,也就是显示它的利益。“已作善”等词的含义是这样的:你已经作了善,也就是清净的行为,所以你就是“已作善者”。同样,你已经作了善巧、无可指责的行为,所以是“已作善巧者”。“已作怖畏救护”是指:死亡来临时,众生心中生起称为怖畏的恐惧,你已经作了从那种恐惧中救护、保护的业,所以是“已作怖畏救护”。“未作恶”是指你没有作卑劣的业。“未作残酷”是指你没有作残忍、暴虐、恶戒的业。“未作罪垢”是指你没有作暴行以及贪等烦恼炽盛的业。为什么这样说呢?因为一切种类的善,你都已作了;而恶,你没有作。因此我们对你说:“你为什么要被这疾病制伏,过着这种卑劣、罪恶、充满众多痛苦的恶活呢?”你的死亡比你的生命更好,也就是说,你的死比你的生更美好。为什么呢?因为从此处命终之后,你就成为命终者,命终、死去——就是这个意思。身体坏散之后……你将往生到那里。这样往生之后,你在那里将具足、拥有天界所生的五种欲乐,即可爱的色等五种欲的成分,从而享乐、相应、融合,来回游行、漫步或喜悦——就是这个意思。巴利
168. Tattha paṭibaddhacittāti chandarāgena paṭibaddhacittā; sārattā apekkhavantoti attho. Maraṇavaṇṇaṃ saṃvaṇṇemāti jīvite ādīnavaṃ dassetvā maraṇassa guṇaṃ vaṇṇema; ānisaṃsaṃ dassemāti. Katakalyāṇotiādīsu ayaṃ padattho – kalyāṇaṃ sucikammaṃ kataṃ tayāti tvaṃ kho asi katakalyāṇo. Tathā kusalaṃ anavajjakammaṃ kataṃ tayāti katakusalo. Maraṇakāle sampatte yā sattānaṃ uppajjati bhayasaṅkhātā bhīrutā, tato tāyanaṃ rakkhaṇakammaṃ kataṃ tayāti katabhīruttāṇo pāpaṃ. Lāmakakammaṃ akataṃ tayāti akatapāpo. Luddaṃ dāruṇaṃ dussīlyakammaṃ akataṃ tayāti akataluddo. Kibbisaṃ sāhasikakammaṃ lobhādikilesussadaṃ akataṃ tayāti akatakibbiso. Kasmā idaṃ vuccati? Yasmā sabbappakārampi kataṃ tayā kalyāṇaṃ, akataṃ tayā pāpaṃ; tena taṃ vadāma – ‘‘kiṃ tuyhaṃ iminā rogābhibhūtattā lāmakena pāpakena dukkhabahulattā dujjīvitena’’. Mataṃ te jīvitā seyyoti tava maraṇaṃ jīvitā sundarataraṃ. Kasmā? Yasmā ito tvaṃ kālaṅkato katakālo hutvā kālaṃ katvā maritvāti attho. Kāyassa bhedā…pe… upapajjissasi. Evaṃ upapanno ca tattha dibbehi devaloke uppannehi pañcahi kāmaguṇehi manāpiyarūpādikehi pañcahi vatthukāmakoṭṭhāsehi samappito samaṅgībhūto paricarissasi sampayutto samodhānagato hutvā ito cito ca carissasi, vicarissasi abhiramissasi vāti attho.
169 “不适宜的”是指那些无益、不能带来增长,并且会迅速让人寿命耗尽的事物。巴利
169.Asappāyānīti ahitāni avuḍḍhikarāni yāni khippameva jīvitakkhayaṃ pāpenti.
词句分别的注释巴利
Padabhājanīyavaṇṇanā
172 “故意地”——这是对论母中“故意夺取人命”一句里“故意”这个词的摘出解释。其中,“sañcicca”里的“saṃ”是个前缀,和它合在一起,这个说法就表示努力;它的意思是“思虑之后、好好思虑之后”。不过,因为故意夺取生命的人,是知道、明觉的,而且他的夺取是在思虑之后、超越之后才构成违犯的。所以,不依字面,只为了显示其义,便对它作了这样的词句分别:“知道、明觉、思虑之后、超越之后而违犯”。其中,“知道”是指知道“这是有情”。“明觉”是指明觉“我夺取生命”;因此,其义就是既知此有情,又如此了知。“思虑之后”是指以杀心的思,思虑、策划之后。“超越之后”是指以努力的方式,压制并发出无怀疑之心以后。“违犯”是指这样生起者的违犯,这便是“故意”一词的究竟义——如此说。巴利
172.Sañciccāti ayaṃ ‘‘sañcicca manussaviggaha’’nti mātikāya vuttassa sañciccapadassa uddhāro. Tattha santi upasaggo, tena saddhiṃ ussukkavacanametaṃ sañciccāti ; tassa sañcetetvā suṭṭhu cetetvāti attho. Yasmā pana yo sañcicca voropeti, so jānanto sañjānanto hoti, tañcassa voropanaṃ cecca abhivitaritvā vītikkamo hoti. Tasmā byañjane ādaraṃ akatvā atthameva dassetuṃ ‘‘jānanto sañjānanto cecca abhivitaritvā vītikkamo’’ti evamassa padabhājanaṃ vuttaṃ. Tattha jānantoti ‘‘pāṇo’’ti jānanto. Sañjānantoti ‘‘jīvitā voropemī’’ti sañjānanto; teneva pāṇajānanākārena saddhiṃ jānantoti attho. Ceccāti vadhakacetanāvasena cetetvā pakappetvā. Abhivitaritvāti upakkamavasena maddanto nirāsaṅkacittaṃ pesetvā. Vītikkamoti evaṃ pavattassa yo vītikkamo ayaṃ sañciccasaddassa sikhāppatto atthoti vuttaṃ hoti.
现在,为了从最初开始说明“夺取人的生命”这句话里所说的“人的存在状态”,就说了“所谓人的个体”等话。其中,为了从胎生者的角度说明一切极细微的存在状态,说了“在母胎中”。第一心,就是结生心。已生起,就是已产生。第一识显现,这是它的同义词。这里用“在母胎中第一心”这句话,也显示了整个五蕴的结生。因此,那第一心、与它相应的三个非色蕴,以及和它一起生起的羯罗蓝,这就是最初的人的个体。其中,“羯罗蓝”对男女来说,依身十法、心所依十法、性十法而有三十三种色;对非男非女来说,依身十法、心所依十法而有二十种色。其中,男女的羯罗蓝,就像用一根人体生丝做成的针从生酥中挑起的一滴油那样大小,清澈、明净。这在注释书中已经说过——巴利
Idāni ‘‘manussaviggahaṃ jīvitā voropeyyā’’ti ettha vuttaṃ manussattabhāvaṃ ādito paṭṭhāya dassetuṃ ‘‘manussaviggaho nāmā’’tiādimāha. Tattha gabbhaseyyakānaṃ vasena sabbasukhumaattabhāvadassanatthaṃ ‘‘yaṃ mātukucchismi’’nti vuttaṃ. Paṭhamaṃ cittanti paṭisandhicittaṃ. Uppannanti jātaṃ. Paṭhamaṃ viññāṇaṃ pātubhūtanti idaṃ tasseva vevacanaṃ. ‘‘Mātukucchismiṃ paṭhamaṃ citta’’nti vacanena cettha sakalāpi pañcavokārapaṭisandhi dassitā hoti. Tasmā tañca paṭhamaṃ cittaṃ taṃsampayuttā ca tayo arūpakkhandhā tena saha nibbattañca kalalarūpanti ayaṃ sabbapaṭhamo manussaviggaho. Tattha ‘‘kalalarūpa’’nti itthipurisānaṃ kāyavatthubhāvadasakavasena samatiṃsa rūpāni, napuṃsakānaṃ kāyavatthudasakavasena vīsati. Tattha itthipurisānaṃ kalalarūpaṃ jātiuṇṇāya ekena aṃsunā uddhaṭatelabindumattaṃ hoti acchaṃ vippasannaṃ. Vuttañcetaṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ –
“ 就像芝麻油的一滴,又像澄净无浊的酥油精华;
像这样,颜色和形态相似的,就叫做羯罗蓝。”巴利
‘‘Tilatelassa yathā bindu, sappimaṇḍo anāvilo; Evaṃvaṇṇappaṭibhāgaṃ kalalanti pavuccatī’’ti. (vibha. aṭṭha. 26 pakiṇṇakakathā; saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.235);
从这样微小的所依开始,对于通常寿命一百二十岁的有情,直到临终时,在这期间逐渐成长的自体,就叫做人的身形。巴利
Evaṃ parittakaṃ vatthuṃ ādiṃ katvā pakatiyā vīsavassasatāyukassa sattassa yāva maraṇakālā etthantare anupubbena vuḍḍhippatto attabhāvo eso manussaviggaho nāma.
“夺取生命”的意思是:即使在羯罗蓝阶段,用灼烧、按压等方法,或者通过给药等方式,或者在那之后用与此相应的手段,使对方与生命分离。然而,因为所谓夺取生命,从含义上说就是切断命根,所以在对这个词的解释中说:“切断命根、阻断、破坏相续。”其中,切断、阻断命根的相续连接,就称为“切断命根、阻断”。这个含义由“破坏相续”这句话显示出来。“破坏”就是使分离。巴利
Jīvitāvoropeyyāti kalalakālepi tāpanamaddanehi vā bhesajjasampadānena vā tato vā uddhampi tadanurūpena upakkamena jīvitā viyojeyyāti attho. Yasmā pana jīvitā voropanaṃ nāma atthato jīvitindriyupacchedanameva hoti, tasmā etassa padabhājane ‘‘jīvitindriyaṃ upacchindati uparodheti santatiṃ vikopetī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tattha jīvitindriyassa paveṇighaṭanaṃ upacchindanto uparodhento ca ‘‘jīvitindriyaṃ upacchindati uparodhetī’’ti vuccati. Svāyamattho ‘‘santatiṃ vikopetī’’tipadena dassito. Vikopetīti viyojeti.
在这里,命根有两种:色命根和非色命根。其中,对非色命根没法施加加行,所以无法把它夺去;但对色命根则可以施加加行,能够把它夺去。不过,在夺去色命根的时候,非色命根也一并被夺去。因为非色命根正是和色命根一起灭尽的,它的存在依赖于色命根。那么,在夺去的时候,夺去的是过去的、未来的,还是现在的呢?既不是过去的,也不是未来的。因为在这两者当中,一个已经灭去,一个尚未生起,两者都不存在;由于不存在,就没法施加加行;由于没法施加加行,所以连一个也夺不去。对此也有这样的说法:巴利
Tattha duvidhaṃ jīvitindriyaṃ – rūpajīvitindriyaṃ, arūpajīvitindriyañca. Tesu arūpajīvitindriye upakkamo natthi, taṃ voropetuṃ na sakkā. Rūpajīvitindriye pana atthi, taṃ voropetuṃ sakkā. Taṃ pana voropento arūpajīvitindriyampi voropeti. Teneva hi saddhiṃ taṃ nirujjhati tadāyattavuttito. Taṃ pana voropento kiṃ atītaṃ voropeti, anāgataṃ, paccuppannanti? Neva atītaṃ, na anāgataṃ, tesu hi ekaṃ niruddhaṃ ekaṃ anuppannanti ubhapampi asantaṃ, asantattā upakkamo natthi, upakkamassa natthitāya ekampi voropetuṃ na sakkā. Vuttampi cetaṃ –
在过去的心识刹那,他曾活着,现在不活着,将来也不会活着。在未来的心识刹那,他将活着,不曾活着,现在也不活着。在现在的心识刹那,他正活着,不曾活着,将来也不会活着。巴利
‘‘Atīte cittakkhaṇe jīvittha, na jīvati; na jīvissati. Anāgate cittakkhaṇe jīvissati, na jīvittha; na jīvati. Paccuppanne cittakkhaṇe jīvati, na jīvittha; na jīvissatī’’ti (mahāni. 10).
因此,在活命的地方,加害就是合理的,所以它剥夺的是现在(的命根)。巴利
Tasmā yattha jīvati tattha upakkamo yuttoti paccuppannaṃ voropeti.
所谓“现在”也有三种:刹那现在、相续现在、一期现在。其中,“刹那现在”是指具足生、老、坏灭的,它没办法被夺去。为什么呢?因为它自己就会灭去。“相续现在”是指以同类相续的方式持续大约七八个速行心路的时间就灭去的;或者,从热的地方进来、走进内室坐下后,直到黑暗出现;或者从冷的地方进来、在内室坐下后,直到不同季节的相状显现、而前一个季节还没有消退,在这段时间里,就叫“相续现在”。而从结生开始,一直到死亡,这叫“一期现在”。后面这两种都可以被夺去。怎么夺去呢?当对它施加加害时,新得到加害的命根在灭去时,会成为力量微弱、速度减退的相续的缘。因此,相续现在或一期现在还没到预定的时间,就在中途灭去了。这样,后面这两种都可以被夺去,所以正是针对这一点才说“破坏相续”,应当这样理解。巴利
Paccuppannañca nāmetaṃ khaṇapaccuppannaṃ, santatipaccuppannaṃ, addhāpaccuppannanti tividhaṃ. Tattha ‘‘khaṇapaccuppannaṃ’’ nāma uppādajarābhaṅgasamaṅgi, taṃ voropetuṃ na sakkā. Kasmā? Sayameva nirujjhanato. ‘‘Santatipaccuppannaṃ’’ nāma sattaṭṭhajavanavāramattaṃ sabhāgasantativasena pavattitvā nirujjhanakaṃ, yāva vā uṇhato āgantvā ovarakaṃ pavisitvā nisinnassa andhakāraṃ hoti, sītato vā āgantvā ovarake nisinnassa yāva visabhāgautupātubhāvena purimako utu nappaṭippassambhati, etthantare ‘‘santatipaccuppanna’’nti vuccati . Paṭisandhito pana yāva cuti, etaṃ ‘‘addhāpaccuppannaṃ’’ nāma. Tadubhayampi voropetuṃ sakkā. Kathaṃ? Tasmiñhi upakkame kate laddhupakkamaṃ jīvitanavakaṃ nirujjhamānaṃ dubbalassa parihīnavegassa santānassa paccayo hoti. Tato santatipaccuppannaṃ vā addhāpaccuppannaṃ vā yathāparicchinnaṃ kālaṃ apatvā antarāva nirujjhati . Evaṃ tadubhayampi voropetuṃ sakkā, tasmā tadeva sandhāya ‘‘santatiṃ vikopetī’’ti idaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ.
为了把这件事说清楚,应当了解什么是命、什么是杀生、什么是杀生者、什么是杀生的加行。其中,从世俗的说法来讲,“命”就是指有情众生;从究竟真实来讲,“命”就是指命根。因为当人伤害命根时,就说他“杀命”,这命根就是前面所说的那种。所谓“杀生”,是指以某种思心所发起断除命根的加行,那个杀害的思心所就称为“杀生”。所谓“杀生者”,应当理解为具有所说的那种思心所的人。所谓“杀生的加行”,是指杀生的六种加行:亲手、教令、投掷、固定、咒术所成、神通所成。巴利
Imassa panatthassa āvibhāvatthaṃ pāṇo veditabbo, pāṇātipāto veditabbo, pāṇātipāti veditabbo, pāṇātipātassa payogo veditabbo. Tattha ‘‘pāṇo’’ti vohārato satto, paramatthato jīvitindriyaṃ. Jīvitindriyañhi atipātento ‘‘pāṇaṃ atipātetī’’ti vuccati taṃ vuttappakārameva. ‘‘Pāṇātipāto’’ti yāya cetanāya jīvitindriyupacchedakaṃ payogaṃ samuṭṭhāpeti, sā vadhakacetanā ‘‘pāṇātipāto’’ti vuccati. ‘‘Pāṇātipātī’’ti vuttacetanāsamaṅgi puggalo daṭṭhabbo. ‘‘Pāṇātipātassa payogo’’ti pāṇātipātassa chapayogā – sāhatthiko, āṇattiko, nissaggiyo, thāvaro, vijjāmayo, iddhimayoti.
在这里,“亲手”是指杀人者自己用身体或身体所带的东西去打。“教令”是指命令别人说“这样刺、这样打,把他杀掉”,也就是下命令。“投掷”是指想杀掉站在远处的人,用身体或身体所带的东西把箭、刀、网、石头等投掷出去。“固定”是指想用不能移动的工具杀人,而设置陷阱、靠壁、放置药物等。这四种将在后面的圣典注释中详细说明。巴利
Tattha ‘‘sāhatthiko’’ti sayaṃ mārentassa kāyena vā kāyappaṭibaddhena vā paharaṇaṃ. ‘‘Āṇattiko’’ti aññaṃ āṇāpentassa ‘‘evaṃ vijjhitvā vā paharitvā vā mārehī’’ti āṇāpanaṃ. ‘‘Nissaggiyo’’ti dūre ṭhitaṃ māretukāmassa kāyena vā kāyappaṭibaddhena vā ususattiyantapāsāṇādīnaṃ nissajjanaṃ. ‘‘Thāvaro’’ti asañcārimena upakaraṇena māretukāmassa opātaapassenaupanikkhipanaṃ bhesajjasaṃvidhānaṃ. Te cattāropi parato pāḷivaṇṇanāyameva vitthārato āvibhavissanti.
咒术所成和神通所成这两种,在巴利圣典正文里并没有出现。它们应当这样理解:简单来说,为了杀人而念咒施术,就是咒术所成的加行。不过在各部注释书里则这样说:“什么是咒术所成的加行?就是阿闼婆术士施行阿闼婆咒术——当城市被围困或战事发生时,他们对敌方、对敌军中的仇敌,制造灾厄,制造祸患,制造疾病,制造热病,让人得绞痛,让人得霍乱,让人得痢疾。阿闼婆术士就是这样施行阿闼婆咒术。持明者则转动咒术之后,当城市被围困时……(中略)……让人得痢疾。”注释书这样展示了咒术所成的加行之后,又举出许多被阿闼婆术士和持明者杀死的事例——那些又有什么用呢!这里的关键特征就是:为了杀人而念咒施术,便是咒术所成的加行。巴利
Vijjāmayaiddhimayā pana pāḷiyaṃ anāgatā. Te evaṃ veditabbā. Saṅkhepato hi māraṇatthaṃ vijjāparijappanaṃ vijjāmayo payogo. Aṭṭhakathāsu pana ‘‘katamo vijjāmayo payogo? Āthabbaṇikā āthabbaṇaṃ payojenti; nagare vā ruddhe saṅgāme vā paccupaṭṭhite paṭisenāya paccatthikesu paccāmittesu ītiṃ uppādenti, upaddavaṃ uppādenti, rogaṃ uppādenti, pajjarakaṃ uppādenti, sūcikaṃ karonti, visūcikaṃ karonti, pakkhandiyaṃ karonti. Evaṃ āthabbaṇikā āthabbaṇaṃ payojenti. Vijjādhārā vijjaṃ parivattetvā nagare vā ruddhe…pe… pakkhandiyaṃ karontī’’ti evaṃ vijjāmayaṃ payogaṃ dassetvā āthabbaṇikehi ca vijjādharehi ca māritānaṃ bahūni vatthūni vuttāni, kiṃ tehi! Idañhettha lakkhaṇaṃ māraṇāya vijjāparijappanaṃ vijjāmayo payogoti.
业报所生神通的运用,就是神通所成的加行。而所谓业报所生的神通,其实种类很多:龙有龙的神通,金翅鸟有金翅鸟的神通,夜叉有夜叉的神通,天人有天人的神通,国王有国王的神通。其中,龙的神通应当理解为:龙用看见、咬、触碰的方式去伤害别的众生。金翅鸟的神通应当理解为:能从大海里把两三百庹那么大的龙抓出来。夜叉则不同,他们来的时候看不见,打的时候也看不见,可是被他们打中的众生当场就死在那里,这就是夜叉的神通。天人的神通应当理解为:多闻天王在还没证得入流果之前,用眼睛作武器看鸠槃荼,就能让他们死去,其他天人各自也有各自的神通威力。国王的神通应当理解为:转轮王和他的随从能在空中飞行等等;阿育王能在上下各一由旬的范围内下令行事等等;还有父王狮子国国王用牙一击,就让秋喇苏玛那居士死去。巴利
Kammavipākajāya iddhiyā payojanaṃ iddhimayo payogo. Kammavipākajiddhi ca nāmesā nāgānaṃ nāgiddhi, supaṇṇānaṃ supaṇṇiddhi, yakkhānaṃ yakkhiddhi, devānaṃ deviddhi, rājūnaṃ rājiddhīti bahuvidhā. Tattha diṭṭhadaṭṭhaphuṭṭhavisānaṃ nāgānaṃ disvā ḍaṃsitvā phusitvā ca parūpaghātakaraṇe ‘‘nāgiddhi’’ veditabbā. Supaṇṇānaṃ mahāsamuddato dvattibyāmasatappamāṇanāguddharaṇe ‘‘supaṇṇiddhi’’ veditabbā. Yakkhā pana neva āgacchantā na paharantā dissanti, tehi pahaṭasattā pana tasmiṃyeva ṭhāne maranti, tatra tesaṃ ‘‘yakkhiddhi’’ daṭṭhabbā. Vessavaṇassa sotāpannakālato pubbe nayanāvudhena olokitakumbhaṇḍānaṃ maraṇe aññesañca devānaṃ yathāsakaṃ iddhānubhāve ‘‘deviddhi’’ veditabbā. Rañño cakkavattissa saparisassa ākāsagamanādīsu, asokassa heṭṭhā upari ca yojane āṇāpavattanādīsu, piturañño ca sīhaḷanarindassa dāṭhākoṭanena cūḷasumanakuṭumbiyassamaraṇe ‘‘rājiddhi’’ daṭṭhabbāti.
有些人则引用这样的经文:“再者,比丘们,如果有具足神通、心得自在的沙门或婆罗门,以邪恶的心对别人腹中的胎儿这样作意:‘但愿这腹中的胎儿不能平安出生。’比丘们,这样也是对家族的伤害。”他们举出这类经文之后,就说修习所成的神通也能做伤害他人的事;而且他们认为,在伤害他人的同时,神通也会毁坏,就像被燃烧的房屋围住的水罐会破裂一样。但这只是他们自己的想法罢了。为什么呢?因为这种说法和善三法、受三法、寻三法、小三法的分类对不上。怎么对不上呢?修习所成的神通,在善三法里既是善也是无记,而杀生是不善。在受三法里,神通和不苦不乐受相应,杀生则和苦受相应。在寻三法里,神通是无寻无伺,杀生则有寻有伺。在小三法里,神通是广大法,杀生是小法。巴利
Keci pana ‘‘puna caparaṃ, bhikkhave, samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā iddhimā cetovasippatto aññissā kucchigataṃ gabbhaṃ pāpakena manasāanupekkhitā hoti ‘aho vatāyaṃ kucchigato gabbho na sotthinā abhinikkhameyyā’ti. Evampi bhikkhave kulumbassa upaghāto hotī’’ti ādikāni suttāni dassetvā bhāvanāmayiddhiyāpi parūpaghātakammaṃ vadanti; saha parūpaghātakaraṇena ca ādittagharūparikhittassa udakaghaṭassa bhedanamiva iddhivināsañca icchanti; taṃ tesaṃ icchāmattameva. Kasmā? Yasmā kusalavedanāvitakkaparittattikehi na sameti. Kathaṃ? Ayañhi bhāvanāmayiddhi nāma kusalattike kusalā ceva abyākatā ca, pāṇātipāto akusalo. Vedanāttike adukkhamasukhasampayuttā pāṇātipāto dukkhasampayutto. Vitakkattike avitakkāvicārā, pāṇātipāto savitakkasavicāro. Parittattike mahaggatā, pāṇātipāto parittoti.
“或为他寻找夺命工具”:这里,“夺”就是夺取。夺取什么?生命。或者,可被夺取的东西就叫“夺取者”,意思是应当被放置(到他面前)。“工具”和“夺取者”合在一起,就是“夺命工具”。“他的”指人的身体。“寻找”意思是,能怎么弄到就怎么做,也就是应当把它放置(到他身边)。这就说明必须实际使用固定的手段。否则,仅仅找到了就犯巴拉基格,那是不合理的。不过在巴利原文里,并没有把全部文句都引用出来;这里所说的武器属于固定使用的手段,为了单独指出它,才作了“剑……中间省略……绳子”这样的逐词解释。巴利
Satthahārakaṃ vāssa pariyeseyyāti ettha haratīti hārakaṃ. Kiṃ harati? Jīvitaṃ. Atha vā haritabbanti hārakaṃ; upanikkhipitabbanti attho. Satthañca taṃ hārakañcāti satthahārakaṃ. Assāti manussaviggahassa. Pariyeseyyāti yathā labhati tathā kareyya; upanikkhipeyyāti attho. Etena thāvarappayogaṃ dasseti. Itarathā hi pariyiṭṭhamatteneva pārājiko bhaveyya; na cetaṃ yuttaṃ. Pāḷiyaṃ pana sabbaṃ byañjanaṃ anādiyitvā yaṃ ettha thāvarappayogasaṅgahitaṃ satthaṃ, tadeva dassetuṃ ‘‘asiṃ vā…pe… rajjuṃ vā’’ti padabhājanaṃ vuttaṃ.
在这里,“武器”应当理解为除了前面已经说过的之外,任何带刃的东西。棍棒、石块、毒药、绳索这些,因为都能毁坏生命,所以也应归入“武器”的范围。
“或者赞叹死亡”:在这里,有人用“你这种罪恶、低劣的生活有什么用?你连好的食物都吃不上”这类方式,来显示活着的过患;又用“你是近事男,已经做了善事……你没有做过恶事,死了比活着更好,你从这里命终之后,会被天女围绕,在欢喜园里享受快乐”这类方式,来称赞死亡。这两种做法都是在赞叹死亡。因此,解释时分成了两种:显示活着的过患,和称赞死亡。巴利
Tattha satthanti vuttāvasesaṃ yaṃkiñci samukhaṃ veditabbaṃ. Laguḷapāsāṇavisarajjūnañca jīvitavināsanabhāvato satthasaṅgaho veditabbo. Maraṇavaṇṇaṃvāti ettha yasmā ‘‘kiṃ tuyhiminā pāpakena dujjīvitena, yo tvaṃ na labhasi paṇītāni bhojanāni bhuñjitu’’ntiādinā nayena jīvite ādīnavaṃ dassentopi ‘‘tvaṃ khosi upāsaka katakalyāṇo…pe… akataṃ tayā pāpaṃ, mataṃ te jīvitā seyyo, ito tvaṃ kālaṅkato paricarissasi accharāparivuto nandanavane sukhappatto viharissasī’’tiādinā nayena maraṇe vaṇṇaṃ bhaṇantopi maraṇavaṇṇameva saṃvaṇṇeti. Tasmā dvidhā bhinditvā padabhājanaṃ vuttaṃ – ‘‘jīvite ādīnavaṃ dasseti, maraṇe vaṇṇaṃ bhaṇatī’’ti.
“或劝人死”是指让人采取导致死亡的方法。在“拿刀来”这类说法里,虽然没有提到“掉进坑里、地狱或悬崖”等等,但因为后面已经说明了这个道理,就该知道这些在意义上也已经说到了。毕竟不可能把一切都按它具体的样子一一说出来。巴利
Maraṇāya vā samādapeyyāti maraṇatthāya upāyaṃ gāhāpeyya. Satthaṃ vā āharāti ādīsu ca yampi na vuttaṃ ‘‘sobbhe vā narake vā papāte vā papatā’’tiādi, taṃ sabbaṃ parato vuttanayattā atthato vuttamevāti veditabbaṃ. Na hi sakkā sabbaṃ sarūpeneva vattuṃ.
“如是心、如是意”:这里说的是“如是之心、如是之意”;在“死对你比活着更好”这句话里,指的是死亡之心、死亡之意。不过,这里说“意”是为了说明“心”这个词的含义,而从意义上说,这两者其实是同一个东西,所以为了显示它们在意义上没有差别,就说“心即是意,意即是心”。即使把“如是”这个词抽出来,意思也还没有真正说清楚。在“种种思惟”这个说法里,应当根据上下文把“如是”补进去。要知道,虽然这里没有直接说成“如是种种思惟”,但根据上下文,其实已经表达了这层意思。同样地,为了显示这个意思,经文接着说了“有死亡想”等等。还有,这里的“思惟”并不是指“寻”这个心所,而只是“安排、筹划”的另一种说法。而这种安排,在这个语境里,可以归入想、思、意图之中。所以,应当理解为:他的思惟是种种、多样的,因此叫“种种思惟”。同样地,它的词语解释也是按照想、思、意图来说的。这里所说的“意图”,应当理解为“寻”。巴利
Iticittamanoti iticitto itimano; ‘‘mataṃ te jīvitā seyyo’’ti ettha vuttamaraṇacitto maraṇamanoti attho. Yasmā panettha mano cittasaddassa atthadīpanatthaṃ vutto, atthato panetaṃ ubhayampi ekameva, tasmā tassa atthato abhedaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘yaṃ cittaṃ taṃ mano, yaṃ mano taṃ citta’’nti vuttaṃ. Itisaddaṃ pana uddharitvāpi na tāva attho vutto. Cittasaṅkappoti imasmiṃ pade adhikāravasena itisaddo āharitabbo. Idañhi ‘‘iticittasaṅkappo’’ti evaṃ avuttampi adhikārato vuttameva hotīti veditabbaṃ. Tathā hissa tamevaatthaṃ dassento ‘‘maraṇasaññī’’tiādimāha. Yasmā cettha ‘‘saṅkappo’’ti nayidaṃ vitakkassa nāmaṃ. Atha kho saṃvidahanamattassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Tañca saṃvidahanaṃ imasmiṃ atthe saññācetanādhippāyehi saṅgahaṃ gacchati. Tasmā citto nānappakārako saṅkappo assāti cittasaṅkappoti evamattho daṭṭhabbo. Tathā hissa padabhājanampi saññācetanādhippāyavasena vuttaṃ. Ettha ca ‘‘adhippāyo’’ti vitakko veditabbo.
以种种差别的方式,是指以大大小小的各种方法。其中,在赞叹死亡方面,应当知道:通过显示活着的过患,这是小的方式;通过称赞死亡,这是大的方式。而在劝人赴死方面,应当知道:通过握拳、用膝盖顶撞等来劝人赴死,这是大的方式;比如在共同进食的人指甲里投毒等来劝人赴死,这是小的方式。巴利
Uccāvacehi ākārehīti mahantāmahantehi upāyehi. Tattha maraṇavaṇṇasaṃvaṇṇane tāva jīvite ādīnavadassanavasena avacākāratā maraṇe vaṇṇabhaṇanavasena uccākāratā veditabbā. Samādapane pana muṭṭhijāṇunipphoṭanādīhi maraṇasamādapanavasena uccākāratā, ekato bhuñjantassa nakhe visaṃ pakkhipitvā maraṇādisamādapanavasena avacākāratā veditabbā.
在坑穴、地狱或悬崖中:这里,坑穴指的是四周陡峭、深邃的坑洞。地狱指的是地面处处开裂而自然形成的大裂缝,大象也会掉进去,盗贼也藏身其中。悬崖指的是一侧陡峭断绝的地方,或在山与山之间,或在陆地与陆地之间。依前者:这是就行淫法、取不与物而犯巴拉基格的人而说的。其余内容因为前面已经说过,而且含义浅显,所以很清楚。巴利
Sobbhe vā narake vā papāte vāti ettha sobbho nāma samantato chinnataṭo gambhīro āvāṭo. Narako nāma tattha tattha phalantiyā bhūmiyā sayameva nibbattā mahādarī, yattha hatthīpi patanti, corāpi nilīnā tiṭṭhanti. Papātoti pabbatantare vā thalantare vā ekato chinno hoti. Purime upādāyāti methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭisevitvā adinnañca ādiyitvā pārājikaṃ āpattiṃ āpanne puggale upādāya. Sesaṃ pubbe vuttanayattā uttānatthattā ca pākaṭamevāti.
174 174. 这样把已经诵出的学处按顺序逐条解释之后,现在,因为在前面对词语的解释中,只是简略地显示了人的巴拉基格,并没有详细地举出罪相来确立纲目。而在简略显示的意义当中,比丘们并不能以一切方式掌握其方法,未来恶人也就有了可乘之机。因此,为了让比丘们能以一切方式掌握方法,也为了遮止未来恶人的可乘之机,再次以“自己决意”等方式确立纲目,详细显示人的巴拉基格,而说“自己杀”等。巴利
174. Evaṃ uddiṭṭhasikkhāpadaṃ padānukkamena vibhajitvā idāni yasmā heṭṭhā padabhājanīyamhi saṅkhepeneva manussaviggahapārājikaṃ dassitaṃ, na vitthārena āpattiṃ āropetvā tanti ṭhapitā. Saṅkhepadassite ca atthe na sabbākāreneva bhikkhū nayaṃ gahetuṃ sakkonti, anāgate ca pāpapuggalānampi okāso hoti, tasmā bhikkhūnañca sabbākārena nayaggahaṇatthaṃ anāgate ca pāpapuggalānaṃ okāsapaṭibāhanatthaṃ puna ‘‘sāmaṃ adhiṭṭhāyā’’tiādinā nayena mātikaṃ ṭhapetvā vitthārato manussaviggahapārājikaṃ dassento ‘‘sāmanti sayaṃ hanatī’’tiādimāha.
这里,连同难词注释一起作出的判定如下:“以身”是指用手、脚、拳头、膝盖等任何大小肢体。“以身所系物”是指没有从身体上解下来的刀剑等武器。“以投掷物”是指从身体和身所系物上解下来后投掷出去的箭、矛等。到这里,已经说明了亲手杀和投掷杀这两种加行。巴利
Tatrāyaṃ anuttānapadavaṇṇanāya saddhiṃ vinicchayakathā – kāyenāti hatthena vā pādena vā muṭṭhinā vā jāṇunā vā yena kenaci aṅgapaccaṅgena. Kāyapaṭibaddhenāti kāyato amocitena asiādinā paharaṇena. Nissaggiyenāti kāyato ca kāyapaṭibaddhato ca mocitena ususattiādinā. Ettāvatā sāhatthiko ca nissaggiyo cāti dve payogā vuttā honti.
在这里,每一种又按是否指定目标分成两类。其中,指定目标的情况是:他针对某个指定对象下手,就因那个对象死亡这件事而结罪。没有指定目标的情况是:心里想“不管是谁,死了就行”,这样因为下手这个因缘,无论谁死了,都因这件事而结罪。不管哪种情况,如果打下去当时就死了,或者后来因为同一伤病而死,都是在打下手的当下就结罪。如果带着杀意打了一下,对方没死,后来又起了别的心念再打一下,假如对方是因为第一击而死的,那就只跟第一击的业绑在一起;如果是因为第二击而死的,就不构成杀生。即使对方因这两击而死,也还是只跟第一击的业绑在一起。即使对方没有因这两击而死,也没有杀生。这个道理也适用于很多人一起打一个人的情形,同样是跟导致死亡的那一击结罪。巴利
Tattha ekameko uddissānuddissabhedato duvidho. Tattha uddesike yaṃ uddissa paharati, tasseva maraṇena kammunā bajjhati. ‘‘Yo koci maratū’’ti evaṃ anuddesike pahārappaccayā yassa kassaci maraṇena kammunā bajjhati. Ubhayathāpi ca paharitamatte vā maratu pacchā vā teneva rogena, paharitamatteyeva kammunā bajjhati. Maraṇādhippāyena ca pahāraṃ datvā tena amatassa puna aññacittena pahāre dinne pacchāpi yadi paṭhamappahāreneva marati, tadā eva kammunā baddho. Atha dutiyappahārena marati, natthi pāṇātipāto. Ubhayehi matepi paṭhamappahāreneva kammunā baddho. Ubhayehi amate nevatthi pāṇātipāto. Esa nayo bahūhipi ekassa pahāre dinne. Tatrāpi hi yassa pahārena marati, tasseva kammunā baddho hotīti.
在这里,还应当了解业与犯戒之间的差别,以及羊的四种情况。有人盯着一只躺在某处的羊,心想“我夜里来杀它”。而羊躺的地方,却躺着他的母亲、父亲或一位阿拉汉,身上披着黄褐色的袈裟。他夜里来,心想“我要杀羊”,结果杀了母亲、父亲或阿拉汉。因为当时有“我要杀这个东西”的作意,所以他既是杀者,也触犯了无间业,并犯巴拉基格。如果躺在那里的是别的外来人,他心想“我要杀羊”而杀了那人,他既是杀者,也犯巴拉基格,但不触犯无间业。如果躺在那里的是夜叉或饿鬼,他心想“我要杀羊”而杀了它,他只是杀者,不触无间业,也不犯巴拉基格,但犯土喇咤亚。如果那里没有别人躺着,就是一只羊,他杀了它,他既是杀者,也犯巴吉帝亚。如果他心想“我要杀母亲、父亲或阿拉汉中的某一位”,结果确实杀了其中一位,他既是杀者,也触无间业,并犯巴拉基格。如果他心想“我要杀他们中的某一位”,结果杀了别的外来人,或杀了夜叉、饿鬼,或杀了羊,就按前面所说的道理来理解。不过在这里,作意是极其凶暴的。巴利
Kammāpattibyattibhāvatthañcettha eḷakacatukkampi veditabbaṃ. Yo hi eḷakaṃ ekasmiṃ ṭhāne nipannaṃ upadhāreti ‘‘rattiṃ āgantvā vadhissāmī’’ti. Eḷakassa ca nipannokāse tassa mātā vā pitā vā arahā vā paṇḍukāsāvaṃ pārupitvā nipanno hoti. So rattibhāge āgantvā ‘‘eḷakaṃ māremī’’ti mātaraṃ vā pitaraṃ vā arahantaṃ vā māreti. ‘‘Imaṃ vatthuṃ māremī’’ti cetanāya atthibhāvato ghātako ca hoti, anantariyakammañca phusati, pārājikañca āpajjati . Añño koci āgantuko nipanno hoti , ‘‘eḷakaṃ māremī’’ti taṃ māreti, ghātako ca hoti pārājikañca āpajjati, ānantariyaṃ na phusati. Yakkho vā peto vā nipanno hoti, ‘‘eḷakaṃ māremī’’ti taṃ māreti ghātakova hoti, na cānantariyaṃ phusati, na ca pārājikaṃ āpajjati, thullaccayaṃ pana hoti. Añño koci nipanno natthi, eḷakova hoti taṃ māreti, ghātako ca hoti, pācittiyañca āpajjati. ‘‘Mātāpituarahantānaṃ aññataraṃ māremī’’ti tesaṃyeva aññataraṃ māreti, ghātako ca hoti, ānantariyañca phusati, pārājikañca āpajjati. ‘‘Tesaṃ aññataraṃ māressāmī’’ti aññaṃ āgantukaṃ māreti, yakkhaṃ vā petaṃ vā māreti, eḷakaṃ vā māreti, pubbe vuttanayena veditabbaṃ. Idha pana cetanā dāruṇā hotīti.
在这里,还应当知道其他像稻草堆这类情形。比如有人想“我要擦拭血刀或矛”,结果进入稻草堆时,杀死了躺在里面的母亲、父亲、阿拉汉、外来的人、夜叉、饿鬼或畜生。从世俗说法来讲,他被称为“杀者”,但因为并没有杀心,所以既不构成业,也不犯戒。可是,如果有人在进入时察觉到了身体的触感,心想“里面想必有众生,让它死吧”,然后进入杀死,那么就要根据那些对象的不同,判定他结业和犯戒。这个道理,也适用于为了藏匿而进入的人,以及向丛林、灌木丛等处投掷的人。巴利
Aññānipi ettha palālapuñjādivatthūni veditabbāni. Yo hi ‘‘lohitakaṃ asiṃ vā sattiṃ vā pucchissāmī’’ti palālapuñje pavesento tattha nipannaṃ mātaraṃ vā pitaraṃ vā arahantaṃ vā āgantukapurisaṃ vā yakkhaṃ vā petaṃ vā tiracchānagataṃ vā māreti, vohāravasena ‘‘ghātako’’ti vuccati, vadhakacetanāya pana abhāvato neva kammaṃ phusati, na āpattiṃ āpajjati. Yo pana evaṃ pavesento sarīrasamphassaṃ sallakkhetvā ‘‘satto maññe abbhantaragato maratū’’ti pavesetvā māreti, tassa tesaṃ vatthūnaṃ anurūpena kammabaddho ca āpatti ca veditabbā. Esa nayo tattha nidahanatthaṃ pavesentassāpi vanappagumbādīsu khipantassāpi.
如果有人想着“我要杀贼”,结果杀死了扮成贼的样子走来的父亲,他就触犯了无间业,也犯下巴拉基格罪。但如果有人看见敌军中另一个战士正在和父亲交战,就向那个战士射箭,心想“射中这个人,就会射中我父亲”,而箭正好按他的意图射中了父亲,那他就是杀父者。如果他想的是“那个战士被射中后,我父亲就会逃走”而射箭,箭却没有按他的意图飞,结果杀死了父亲,那么按世俗的说法,他被称为“杀父者”,但并没有无间业。巴利
Yopi ‘‘coraṃ māremī’’ti coravesena gacchantaṃ pitaraṃ māreti, ānantariyañca phusati, pārājiko ca hoti. Yo pana parasenāya aññañca yodhaṃ pitarañca kammaṃ karonte disvā yodhassa usuṃ khipati, ‘‘etaṃ vijjhitvā mama pitaraṃ vijjhissatī’’ti yathādhippāyaṃ gate pitughātako hoti. ‘‘Yodhe viddhe mama pitā palāyissatī’’ti khipati, usu ayathādhippāyaṃ gantvā pitaraṃ māreti, vohāravasena ‘‘pitughātako’’ti vuccati; ānantariyaṃ pana natthīti.
“坚定地将心指向它而站在近处”是指站在附近。“命令”是指指定对象或没有指定对象而发出命令。其中,当敌军已经列阵在前,若没有指定对象就命令“这样射、这样打、这样杀”,那么受命者杀多少,双方就有多少杀生。如果这时发令者的父母在场,他也会触犯无间业。如果只有受命者的父母在场,那就只有受命者一人触犯无间业。如果被杀者是阿拉汉,那双方都触犯无间业。但如果是先指定对象再命令“射那个高的、矮的、穿红衣的、穿蓝衣的、坐在象背上的、坐在中间的,打他、杀他”,如果受命者杀的就是那个人,那双方都有杀生;如果所杀的是无间业的对象,那就犯无间业。如果杀的是别人,发令者就没有杀生。到这里,关于命令的加行就讲完了。巴利
Adhiṭṭhahitvāti samīpe ṭhatvā. Āṇāpetīti uddissa vā anuddissa vā āṇāpeti. Tattha parasenāya paccupaṭṭhitāya anuddisseva ‘‘evaṃ vijjha , evaṃ pahara, evaṃ ghātehī’’ti āṇatte yattake āṇatto ghāteti, tattakā ubhinnaṃ pāṇātipātā. Sace tattha āṇāpakassa mātāpitaro honti, ānantariyampi phusati. Sace āṇattasseva mātāpitaro, sova ānantariyaṃ phusati. Sace arahā hoti, ubhopi ānantariyaṃ phusanti. Uddisitvā pana ‘‘etaṃ dīghaṃ rassaṃ rattakañcukaṃ nīlakañcukaṃ hatthikkhandhe nisinnaṃ majjhe nisinnaṃ vijjha pahara ghātehī’’ti āṇatte sace so tameva ghāteti, ubhinnampi pāṇātipāto; ānantariyavatthumhi ca ānantariyaṃ. Sace aññaṃ māreti, āṇāpakassa natthi pāṇātipāto. Etena āṇattiko payogo vutto hoti. Tattha –
对象、时间、地点,武器和举止姿态;
智者应当先衡量这五种情况,再把握其中的义理。巴利
Vatthuṃ kālañca okāsaṃ, āvudhaṃ iriyāpathaṃ; Tulayitvā pañca ṭhānāni, dhāreyyatthaṃ vicakkhaṇo.
事、时、处,武器、威仪,
行为差别,就是这六个命令的决定因素。巴利
Vatthu kālo ca okāso, āvudhaṃ iriyāpatho; Kiriyāvisesoti ime, cha āṇattiniyāmakā.
在这里,“对象”是指要被杀的那个众生。“时间”是指上午、傍晚等时段,以及青年、老年等年龄阶段。“地点”是指村庄、树林、家门口、屋子里面、车道、十字路口等等。“武器”是指剑、箭、矛之类。“威仪路”是指被杀者的行走、坐下等动作姿态。“行为差别”是指刺、砍、劈、剥头皮等等。巴利
Tattha ‘‘vatthū’’ti māretabbo satto. ‘‘Kālo’’ti pubbaṇhasāyanhādikālo ca yobbanathāvariyādikālo ca. ‘‘Okāso’’ti gāmo vā vanaṃ vā gehadvāraṃ vā gehamajjhaṃ vā rathikā vā siṅghāṭakaṃ vāti evamādi. ‘‘Āvudha’’nti asi vā usu vā satti vāti evamādi. ‘‘Iriyāpatho’’ti māretabbassa gamanaṃ vā nisajjā vāti evamādi. ‘‘Kiriyāviseso’’ti vijjhanaṃ vā chedanaṃ vā bhedanaṃ vā saṅkhamuṇḍakaṃ vāti evamādi.
如果违背了对象,命令说“杀掉那个人”,却杀了另一个人;或者命令说“在前面打杀”,却在后面、侧面或其他地方打杀,那么下命令的人不构成业缚,只有受命杀人的人构成业缚。如果没有违背对象,按照命令去杀,那么下命令的人在发出命令的那一刻、受命的人在杀人的那一刻,两者都构成业缚。在这里,由于对象不同,业和罪过也就不同。以上就是关于对象方面,应当先了解什么是符合约定、什么是违背约定。巴利
Yadi hi vatthuṃ visaṃvādetvā ‘‘yaṃ mārehī’’ti āṇatto tato aññaṃ māreti, ‘‘purato paharitvā mārehī’’ti vā āṇatto pacchato vā passato vā aññasmiṃ vā padese paharitvā māreti. Āṇāpakassa natthi kammabandho; āṇattasseva kammabandho. Atha vatthuṃ avisaṃvādetvā yathāṇattiyā māreti, āṇāpakassa āṇattikkhaṇe āṇattassa ca māraṇakkhaṇeti ubhayesampi kammabandho. Vatthuvisesena panettha kammaviseso ca āpattiviseso ca hotīti. Evaṃ tāva vatthumhi saṅketavisaṅketatā veditabbā.
如果只是命令“午前去杀”,没有限定“今天还是明天”,那么受命的人不管哪一天午前去杀,都不算违背约定。但如果命令的是“今天午前去杀”,他却在中午、傍晚,或者第二天午前才去杀,那就违背了约定,下命令的人也不承担业缚。如果受命的人本来想在午前杀,努力到中午才得手,道理也一样。按照这个道理,就应该明白:在各种时间差别中,什么时候算守约、什么时候算违约。巴利
Kāle pana yo ‘‘ajja sve’’ti aniyametvā ‘‘pubbaṇhe mārehī’’ti āṇatto yadā kadāci pubbaṇhe māreti, natthi visaṅketo. Yo pana ‘‘ajja pubbaṇhe’’ti vutto majjhanhe vā sāyanhe vā sve vā pubbaṇhe māreti. Visaṅketo hoti, āṇāpakassa natthi kammabandho. Pubbaṇhe māretuṃ vāyamantassa majjhanhe jātepi eseva nayo. Etena nayena sabbakālappabhedesu saṅketavisaṅketatā veditabbā.
关于地点:如果命令时没有限定,只说“把站在村里的那个人杀掉”,那么受命的人不管在哪里杀了他,都不算违背约定。但如果命令时限定了“只能在村里杀”,他却在树林里杀了;同样,命令说“在树林里杀”,他却在村里杀了;命令说“在内屋门口杀”,他却在屋子中间杀了——这就违背了约定。按照这个道理,应当知道:在一切地点差别中,什么情况算守约、什么情况算违约。巴利
Okāsepi yo ‘‘etaṃ gāme ṭhitaṃ mārehī’’ti aniyametvā āṇatto taṃ yattha katthaci māreti, natthi visaṅketo. Yo pana ‘‘gāmeyevā’’ti niyametvā āṇatto vane māreti, tathā ‘‘vane’’ti āṇatto gāme māreti. ‘‘Antogehadvāre’’ti āṇatto gehamajjhe māreti, visaṅketo. Etena nayena sabbokāsabhedesu saṅketavisaṅketatā veditabbā.
关于武器,如果一个人被命令“用武器杀”,但没有限定“用剑还是用箭”,那么他用任何一种武器去杀,都不算违越约定。但如果他被吩咐“用剑”却用箭去杀,被吩咐“用这把剑”却用另一把剑去杀;或者对同一把剑,他被吩咐“用这个刃杀”却用另一个刃、或用剑面、剑尖、剑柄去杀,那就违越约定了。按照这个道理,应当知道在一切武器种类中,都有约定和违越约定的情况。巴利
Āvudhepi yo ‘‘asinā vā usunā vā’’ti aniyametvā ‘‘āvudhena mārehī’’ti āṇatto yena kenaci āvudhena māreti, natthi visaṅketo. Yo pana ‘‘asinā’’ti vutto usunā, ‘‘iminā vā asinā’’ti vutto aññena asinā māreti. Etasseva vā asissa ‘‘imāya dhārāya mārehī’’ti vutto itarāya vā dhārāya talena vā tuṇḍena vā tharunā vā māreti, visaṅketo. Etena nayena sabbaāvudhabhedesu saṅketavisaṅketatā veditabbā.
关于威仪方面,如果有人说“把那个正在走的人杀掉”,受命者如果杀了正在走的他,就不算违背约定。但如果被吩咐“只杀正在走的人”,却杀了坐着的人;或者被吩咐“只杀坐着的人”,却杀了正在走的人,那就是违背约定。按照这个方式,在各种威仪差别中,应当了解约定和违背约定的情况。巴利
Iriyāpathe pana yo ‘‘etaṃ gacchantaṃ mārehī’’ti vadati, āṇatto ca naṃ sace gacchantaṃ māreti, natthi visaṅketo. ‘‘Gacchantameva mārehī’’ti vutto pana sace nisinnaṃ māreti. ‘‘Nisinnameva vā mārehī’’ti vutto gacchantaṃ māreti, visaṅketo hoti. Etena nayena sabbairiyāpathabhedesu saṅketavisaṅketatā veditabbā.
在行为方式上也是如此:如果有人被吩咐“刺穿后再杀”,他就确实刺穿后再杀,那就不算违背约定。但如果有人被吩咐“刺穿后再杀”,他却砍断后再杀,那就是违背约定。按照这个方法,在各种行为方式的差别中,应当知道什么是符合约定、什么是违背约定。巴利
Kiriyāvisesepi yo ‘‘vijjhitvā mārehī’’ti vutto vijjhitvāva māreti, natthi visaṅketo. Yo pana ‘‘vijjhitvā mārehī’’ti vutto chinditvā māreti, visaṅketo. Etena nayena sabbakiriyāvisesabhedesu saṅketavisaṅketatā veditabbā.
如果有人不具体指定,只按特征下令说“把长的、短的、黑的、白的、瘦的、胖的杀掉”,受命的人杀了任何一个这类人,那双方都不算违约,都犯巴拉基格。但如果他是针对自己下令,受命的人心想“就是这个人”,结果杀了下令者本人,那下令者犯恶作,杀人者犯巴拉基格。如果下令者是针对自己下令,而对方却杀了另一个这类人,那下令者无罪,只有杀人者犯巴拉基格。为什么?因为没有限定地点。不过,即使是针对自己下令,如果限定了地点,说“在某处夜间住处、日间住处、上座座位、新学座位或中间座位上坐着的那种人,你杀他”,而那里坐的却是另一个人,受命的人如果杀了那个人,杀人者不能脱罪,下令者也不能脱罪。为什么?因为地点已经限定了。如果在限定地点以外的地方杀,下令者就无罪。这个道理在大注疏里已经讲得很清楚、很确定了,所以在这里不应该轻慢对待。巴利
Yo pana liṅgavasena ‘‘dīghaṃ rassaṃ kāḷaṃ odātaṃ kisaṃ thūlaṃ mārehī’’ti aniyametvā āṇāpeti, āṇatto ca yaṃkiñci tādisaṃ māreti, natthi visaṅketo ubhinnaṃ pārājikaṃ. Atha pana so attānaṃ sandhāya āṇāpeti, āṇatto ca ‘‘ayameva īdiso’’ti āṇāpakameva māreti, āṇāpakassa dukkaṭaṃ, vadhakassa pārājikaṃ. Āṇāpako attānaṃ sandhāya āṇāpeti, itaro aññaṃ tādisaṃ māreti, āṇāpako muccati, vadhakasseva pārājikaṃ. Kasmā? Okāsassa aniyamitattā. Sace pana attānaṃ sandhāya āṇāpentopi okāsaṃ niyameti, ‘‘asukasmiṃ nāma rattiṭṭhāne vā divāṭṭhāne vā therāsane vā navāsane vā majjhimāsane vā nisinnaṃ evarūpaṃ nāma mārehī’’ti. Tattha ca añño nisinno hoti, sace āṇatto taṃ māreti, neva vadhako muccati na āṇāpako. Kasmā? Okāsassa niyamitattā. Sace pana niyamitokāsato aññatra māreti, āṇāpako muccatīti ayaṃ nayo mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ suṭṭhu daḷhaṃ katvā vutto. Tasmā ettha na anādariyaṃ kātabbanti.
现在,为了说明“由使者”这个论母词条的含义,说了“比丘命令比丘”等四种情况。其中,“他认为是那个人”:受命者把命令者所指明的“某某人”就当成那个人,于是夺了那个人的命,两个人都犯巴拉基格。“他认为是那个人却杀了另一个人”:被命令“你去夺某人的命”,受命者以为就是那个人而下手,结果杀了一个相似的另一个人,根本命令者不犯。“他以为是另一个人却杀了那个人”:受命者看到命令者所说的那个人的强壮同伴站在旁边,心想“这人仗着那人的势力才这么嚣张,我先把这个人杀了”,在打下去的时候,那人转身站到了那个位置,受命者误以为那就是“同伴”而夺了他的命,两个人都犯巴拉基格。“他以为是另一个人却杀了另一个人”:按前面的道理,心想“我先把他的同伴杀了”,结果杀的正是同伴,只有那个受命者犯巴拉基格。巴利
Idāni ye dūtenāti imassa mātikāpadassa niddesadassanatthaṃ ‘‘bhikkhu bhikkhuṃ āṇāpetī’’tiādayo cattāro vārā vuttā. Tesu so taṃ maññamānoti so āṇatto yo āṇāpakena ‘‘itthannāmo’’ti akkhāto, taṃ maññamāno tameva jīvitā voropeti, ubhinnaṃ pārājikaṃ. Taṃ maññamāno aññanti ‘‘yaṃ jīvitā voropehī’’ti vutto taṃ maññamāno aññaṃ tādisaṃ jīvitā voropeti, mūlaṭṭhassa anāpatti. Aññaṃ maññamāno tanti yo āṇāpakena vutto, tassa balavasahāyaṃ samīpe ṭhitaṃ disvā ‘‘imassa balenāyaṃ gajjati, imaṃ tāva jīvitā voropemī’’ti paharanto itarameva parivattitvā tasmiṃ ṭhāne ṭhitaṃ ‘‘sahāyo’’ti maññamāno jīvitā voropeti, ubhinnaṃ pārājikaṃ. Aññaṃ maññamāno aññanti purimanayeneva ‘‘imaṃ tāvassa sahāyaṃ jīvitā voropemī’’ti sahāyameva voropeti, tasseva pārājikaṃ.
在解释“使者辗转传递”这一部分时,在“向某某人传达”等语句中,应当知道有一位老师和三位名叫佛护、丹玛·拉奇达、桑卡拉奇达的弟子。其中,“比丘命令比丘”是指:老师想杀死某个人,把这件事说明之后,命令佛护。“向某某人传达”是指:佛护,你去,把这件事传达给丹玛·拉奇达。“某某人应向某某人传达”是指:丹玛·拉奇达也应该向桑卡拉奇达传达。“某某人应夺走某某人的生命”是指:这样被你命令的丹玛·拉奇达所命令的桑卡拉奇达,应该夺走那个人的生命;因为他在我们当中是勇敢的人,有能力做这件事。“犯恶作罪”是指:这样命令的老师,首先就犯了恶作罪。“他向另一个人转告”是指:佛护对丹玛·拉奇达、丹玛·拉奇达对桑卡拉奇达转告说:“我们的老师这样说:‘据说要夺走某某人的生命。’据说你是我们当中的勇士。”这样,他们也犯了恶作罪。“杀手接受”是指:桑卡拉奇达答应说:“好,我将夺走。” “根本者的罪是土喇咤亚”是指:桑卡拉奇达刚一接受,老师就犯了土喇咤亚罪。因为大众是被他指使去做这恶事的。“他如果那样”是指:如果那位桑卡拉奇达夺走了那个人的生命,那么四个人全都犯巴拉基格。不只是四个人,用这种方式,如果不取消约定而辗转命令,即使有百位沙门、千位沙门,所有人全都犯巴拉基格。巴利
Dūtaparamparāpadassa niddesavāre itthannāmassa pāvadātiādīsu eko ācariyo tayo buddharakkhitadhammarakkhitasaṅgharakkhitanāmakā antevāsikā daṭṭhabbā. Tattha bhikkhu bhikkhuṃ āṇāpetīti ācariyo kañci puggalaṃ mārāpetukāmo tamatthaṃ ācikkhitvā buddharakkhitaṃ āṇāpeti. Itthannāmassa pāvadāti gaccha tvaṃ, buddharakkhita, etamatthaṃ dhammarakkhitassa pāvada. Itthannāmo itthannāmassa pāvadatūti dhammarakkhitopi saṅgharakkhitassa pāvadatu. Itthannāmo itthannāmaṃ jīvitā voropetūti evaṃ tayā āṇattena dhammarakkhitena āṇatto saṅgharakkhito itthannāmaṃ puggalaṃ jīvitā voropetu; so hi amhesu vīrajātiko paṭibalo imasmiṃ kammeti. Āpatti dukkaṭassāti evaṃ āṇāpentassa ācariyassa tāva dukkaṭaṃ. So itarassa ārocetīti buddharakkhito dhammarakkhitassa, dhammarakkhito ca saṅgharakkhitassa ‘‘amhākaṃ ācariyo evaṃ vadati – ‘itthannāmaṃ kira jīvitā voropehī’ti. Tvaṃ kira amhesu vīrapuriso’’ti āroceti; evaṃ tesampi dukkaṭaṃ. Vadhako paṭiggaṇhātīti ‘‘sādhu voropessāmī’’ti saṅgharakkhito sampaṭicchati. Mūlaṭṭhassa āpatti thullaccayassāti saṅgharakkhitena paṭiggahitamatte ācariyassa thullaccayaṃ. Mahājano hi tena pāpe niyojitoti. So tanti so ce saṅgharakkhito taṃ puggalaṃ jīvitā voropeti, sabbesaṃ catunnampi janānaṃ pārājikaṃ. Na kevalañca catunnaṃ, etenūpāyena visaṅketaṃ akatvā paramparāya āṇāpentaṃ samaṇasataṃ samaṇasahassaṃ vā hotu sabbesaṃ pārājikameva.
在解释“违越约定的使者”这一词条时,“他命令另一个人”的意思是:佛护被老师命令后,没有去见丹玛·拉奇达,或者不想传达,就直接去找桑卡拉奇达,说:“我们的老师这样说:‘据说要夺取某某人的生命。’”他这样就是在破坏约定而发出命令。正因为他破坏了约定,才被称为“违越约定的使者”。“犯恶作罪”是说:在发出命令时,佛护就先犯了恶作。“接受,犯恶作罪”是说:当桑卡拉奇达答应接受时,应当知道根本者(老师)本身就犯了恶作。如果这样的话,那接受时岂不是没有罪了?可是在传递消息、接受、随喜死亡这些情况下都有罪,接受死亡任务时怎么会没有罪呢?所以,接受者本身就有这个恶作。正因如此,这里没有说“根本者的”。在前面那种方式里,也应当知道接受者有罪;只是因为没机会,所以没有说。因此,无论谁接受,都因为那个原因而有罪,这是我们在这一点上的主张。就像这里一样,在不与取(偷盗)中也是如此。巴利
Visakkiyadūtapadaniddese so aññaṃ āṇāpetīti so ācariyena āṇatto buddharakkhito dhammarakkhitaṃ adisvā vā avattukāmo vā hutvā saṅgharakkhitameva upasaṅkamitvā ‘‘amhākaṃ ācariyo evamāha – ‘itthannāmaṃ kira jīvitā voropehī’’ti visaṅketaṃ karonto āṇāpeti. Visaṅketakaraṇeneva hi esa ‘‘visakkiyadūto’’ti vuccati. Āpatti dukkaṭassāti āṇattiyā tāva buddharakkhitassa dukkaṭaṃ. Paṭiggaṇhāti āpatti dukkaṭassāti saṅgharakkhitena sampaṭicchite mūlaṭṭhasseva dukkaṭanti veditabbaṃ. Evaṃ sante paṭiggahaṇe āpattiyeva na siyā, sañcaritta paṭiggahaṇamaraṇābhinandanesupi ca āpatti hoti, maraṇapaṭiggahaṇe kathaṃ na siyā tasmā paṭiggaṇhantassevetaṃ dukkaṭaṃ. Tenevettha ‘‘mūlaṭṭhassā’’ti na vuttaṃ. Purimanayepi cetaṃ paṭiggaṇhantassa veditabbameva; okāsābhāvena pana na vuttaṃ. Tasmā yo yo paṭiggaṇhāti, tassa tassa tappaccayā āpattiyevāti ayamettha amhākaṃ khanti. Yathā cettha evaṃ adinnādānepīti.
如果那个人真的夺走了他的生命,那么下令的佛护和动手的桑卡拉奇达,两人都犯巴拉基格。但根本老师因为已经取消了约定,所以不犯巴拉基格。丹玛·拉奇达因为不知情,完全无犯。而佛护虽然保全了另外两人,自己却因此堕落了。巴利
Sace pana so taṃ jīvitā voropeti, āṇāpakassa ca buddharakkhitassa voropakassa ca saṅgharakkhitassāti ubhinnampi pārājikaṃ. Mūlaṭṭhassa pana ācariyassa visaṅketattā pārājikena anāpatti. Dhammarakkhitassa ajānanatāya sabbena sabbaṃ anāpatti. Buddharakkhito pana dvinnaṃ sotthibhāvaṃ katvā attanā naṭṭhoti.
在“去而复返的使者”这一释义中:“他去后又回来”,意思是:他走到那个应被夺命的人附近,因为对方守护严密,没法杀掉他,就回来了。“当你能的时候,那时再动手”,意思是:何必今天就要杀?去吧,等你能下手的时候,那时再夺他的命。“犯恶作罪”,意思是:像这样再次下命令,也只是犯恶作罪。但如果那个人必定会被夺命,那么成办此事的思心所就如同道心之后紧接着的果心一样,所以这个人在下命令的当下就犯巴拉基格。即使杀手过了六十年才杀那个人,而下命令的人在中间就命终了,或者还俗了,或者以非沙门身份命终,或者将来会还俗。如果下命令的人在家时,针对母亲、父亲或阿拉汉下了这样的命令,然后出家;在他出家之后,受命的人杀了那个人,那么下命令的人在家时就已经成了杀母者、杀父者或杀阿拉汉者,因此他的出家与达上都不能成立。即使应被杀的人在命令时还是凡夫,但当受命者杀他时,他已经证得阿拉汉;或者他挨了受命者的打击后,依靠由痛苦所生的信心修观,证得阿拉汉果,随后就因为那个病而命终,那么下命令的人在命令的当下就成了杀阿拉汉者。而杀手则在任何情况下,都是在着手行动的当下就犯巴拉基格。巴利
Gatapaccāgatadūtaniddese – so gantvā puna paccāgacchatīti tassa jīvitā voropetabbassa samīpaṃ gantvā susaṃvihitārakkhattā taṃ jīvitā voropetuṃ asakkonto āgacchati. Yadā sakkosi tadāti kiṃ ajjeva mārito mārito hoti, gaccha yadā sakkosi, tadā naṃ jīvitā voropehīti. Āpatti dukkaṭassāti evaṃ puna āṇattiyāpi dukkaṭameva hoti. Sace pana so avassaṃ jīvitā voropetabbo hoti, atthasādhakacetanā maggānantaraphalasadisā, tasmā ayaṃ āṇattikkhaṇeyeva pārājiko. Sacepi vadhako saṭṭhivassātikkamena taṃ vadhati, āṇāpako ca antarāva kālaṅkaroti, hīnāya vā āvattati, assamaṇova hutvā kālañca karissati, hīnāya vā āvattissati. Sace āṇāpako gihikāle mātaraṃ vā pitaraṃ vā arahantaṃ vā sandhāya evaṃ āṇāpetvā pabbajati, tasmiṃ pabbajite āṇatto taṃ māreti, āṇāpako gihikāleyeva mātughātako pitughātako arahantaghātako vā hoti, tasmā nevassa pabbajjā , na upasampadā ruhati. Sacepi māretabbapuggalo āṇattikkhaṇe puthujjano, yadā pana naṃ āṇatto māreti tadā arahā hoti, āṇattato vā pahāraṃ labhitvā dukkhamūlikaṃ saddhaṃ nissāya vipassanto arahattaṃ patvā tenevābādhena kālaṃkaroti, āṇāpako āṇattikkhaṇeyeva arahantaghātako. Vadhako pana sabbattha upakkamakaraṇakkhaṇeyeva pārājikoti.
现在,为了在这些全都以“使者”方式说到的论母项目中,显示合乎约定与违离约定的情况,巴利
Idāni ye sabbesuyeva imesu dūtavasena vuttamātikāpadesu saṅketavisaṅketadassanatthaṃ
已经说了三种情况。其中,第一种情况:因为他说话声音轻细,或者那人耳聋,听不到“不要杀”这句话,所以根本者没有得到解脱。第二种情况:因为对方听到了,所以得到解脱。第三种情况:因为他使对方听到了,而另一个人应诺说“好”之后停手了,所以两个人都得到解脱。巴利
Vuttā tayo vārā, tesu paṭhamavāre tāva – yasmā taṃ saṇikaṃ vā bhaṇanto tassa vā badhiratāya ‘‘mā ghātehī’’ti etaṃ vacanaṃ na sāveti, tasmā mūlaṭṭho na mutto. Dutiyavāre – sāvitattā mutto. Tatiyavāre pana tena ca sāvitattā itarena ca ‘‘sādhū’’ti sampaṭicchitvā oratattā ubhopi muttāti.
175 175. 在“当面而作背后想”等解释中,“当面”指在面前,“背后”指不在面前。其中,当那位有怨的比丘在受供养时和其他比丘一起来,坐在面前,有人因为愚痴昏暗,不知道他已经来了,心里想:“啊,但愿某某被杀掉!连盗贼都不去杀他,蛇也不咬他,也不拿刀或毒来害他!”这样随喜他的死亡而说出这类话,这叫“当面而作背后想而说”。意思是:他明明在面前,却当作他不在面前。如果有人看见他坐在面前,后来他和那些受完供养离开的比丘们一起走了,这人却仍然以为“他就坐在这里”,然后像前面那样说,这叫“背后而作当面想而说”。用同样的方法,应当知道“当面而作当面想”和“背后而作背后想”这两种。还应当知道,这四种情况中,每说一句话都犯恶作。巴利
175. Araho rahosaññīniddesādīsu arahoti sammukhe. Rahoti parammukhe. Tattha yo upaṭṭhānakāle veribhikkhumhi bhikkhūhi saddhiṃ āgantvā purato nisinneyeva andhakāradosena tassa āgatabhāvaṃ ajānanto ‘‘aho vata itthannāmo hato assa, corāpi nāma taṃ na hananti, sappo vā na ḍaṃsati, na satthaṃ vā visaṃ vā āharatī’’ti tassa maraṇaṃ abhinandanto īdisāni vacanāni ullapati, ayaṃ araho rahosaññī ullapati nāma. Sammukheva tasmiṃ parammukhasaññīti attho. Yo pana taṃ purato nisinnaṃ disvā puna upaṭṭhānaṃ katvā gatehi bhikkhūhi saddhiṃ gatepi tasmiṃ ‘‘idheva so nisinno’’ti saññī hutvā purimanayeneva ullapati, ayaṃ raho arahosaññī ullapati nāma. Etenevupāyena araho arahosaññī ca raho rahosaññī ca veditabbo. Catunnampi ca etesaṃ vācāya vācāya dukkaṭanti veditabbaṃ.
现在,为了说明赞叹死亡的各种分类,在前面所说的五种论母解释——以身赞叹等——当中:
“以身做姿态”:就像他心里知道的那样——“拿刀、吃毒、上吊,或者跳进坑里等等而死的人,据说能得到钱财、得到名声,或者生到天界”——他用这个意思,通过手势等身体动作表达出来。
“用言语说”:就是把同样的意思分成句子说出来。
第三种方式,是同时用身体和言语两种方式来说。
在所有这些情况里,每一次赞叹的当下就犯恶作。当被赞叹的人因此产生痛苦时,赞叹的人犯土喇咤亚。如果被赞叹的人死了,就在赞叹的那一刻,赞叹的人犯巴拉基格。
如果被赞叹的人自己不知道,而另一个人知道后心想“我确实找到了获得安乐的方法”,然后因为那个赞叹而死去,那就无犯。
如果是为了两个人而作赞叹,其中一个人知道后死去,犯巴拉基格。如果两个人都死了,犯巴拉基格,同时累积不善业。这个道理对很多人也一样适用。
如果不指定对象,到处漫游赞叹死亡,那么凡是知道这个赞叹而死去的人,都算作被他所杀。巴利
Idāni maraṇavaṇṇasaṃvaṇṇanāya vibhāgadassanatthaṃ vuttesu pañcasu kāyena saṃvaṇṇanādimātikāniddesesu – kāyena vikāraṃ karotīti yathā so jānāti ‘‘satthaṃ vā āharitvā visaṃ vā khāditvā rajjuyā vā ubbandhitvā sobbhādīsu vā papatitvā yo marati so kira dhanaṃ vā labhati, yasaṃ vā labhati, saggaṃ vā gacchatīti ayamattho etena vutto’’ti tathā hatthamuddādīhi dasseti. Vācāya bhaṇatīti tamevatthaṃ vākyabhedaṃ katvā bhaṇati. Tatiyavāro ubhayavasena vutto. Sabbattha saṃvaṇṇanāya payoge payoge dukkaṭaṃ. Tassa dukkhuppattiyaṃ saṃvaṇṇakassa thullaccayaṃ. Yaṃ uddissa saṃvaṇṇanā katā, tasmiṃ mate saṃvaṇṇanakkhaṇeyeva saṃvaṇṇakassa pārājikaṃ. So taṃ na jānāti añño ñatvā ‘‘laddho vata me sukhuppattiupāyo’’ti tāya saṃvaṇṇanāya marati, anāpatti. Dvinnaṃ uddissa saṃvaṇṇanāya katāya eko ñatvā marati, pārājikaṃ. Dvepi maranti, pārājikañca akusalarāsi ca. Esa nayo sambahulesu. Anuddissa maraṇaṃ saṃvaṇṇento āhiṇḍati, yo yo taṃ saṃvaṇṇanaṃ ñatvā marati, sabbo tena mārito hoti.
在通过使者赞叹死亡的情形中,如果吩咐说“你去某某家或某某村,对某某这样赞叹死亡”,只要在指示被传达时,就犯恶作。如果使者是为某人而被派去的,当那人产生痛苦时,主使者犯土喇咤亚;如果那人死了,主使者犯巴拉基格。如果使者心想“他现在已经知道这是生天之道了”,却不告诉那人,而是告诉自己的亲戚或血亲,当那亲戚或血亲死了,使者就违背约定,主使者则无罪。如果使者同样这样想,然后自己按照所赞叹的方式去做而死了,也同样是违背约定。如果不指定对象而传达,那么有多少人因为使者的赞叹而死,就有多少杀生。如果父母因此而死,那就成了无间业。巴利
Dūtena saṃvaṇṇanāyaṃ ‘‘asukaṃ nāma gehaṃ vā gāmaṃ vā gantvā itthannāmassa evaṃ maraṇavaṇṇaṃ saṃvaṇṇehī’’ti sāsane ārocitamatte dukkaṭaṃ. Yassatthāya pahito tassa dukkhuppattiyā mūlaṭṭhassa thullaccayaṃ, maraṇena pārājikaṃ. Dūto ‘‘ñāto dāni ayaṃ saggamaggo’’ti tassa anārocetvā attano ñātissa vā sālohitassa vā āroceti, tasmiṃ mate visaṅketo hoti, mūlaṭṭho muccati. Dūto tatheva cintetvā sayaṃ saṃvaṇṇanāya vuttaṃ katvā marati, visaṅketova. Anuddissa pana sāsane ārocite yattakā dūtassa saṃvaṇṇanāya maranti, tattakā pāṇātipātā. Sace mātāpitaro maranti, ānantariyampi hoti.
176 176. 关于书写描述死亡的说明——“书写”是指在贝叶或纸本上写下文字:“如果有人拿刀自杀,或跳下悬崖,或用火焚、水淹等其他方法死去,就能得到这样那样的好处”,或者写“这就是他的法”。在这里,恶作和土喇咤亚也应当按照前面所说的方式理解。如果针对特定对象而写,那么当所针对的那个人死亡时,就犯巴拉基格。如果为许多人而写,有多少人死亡,就有多少杀生。如果父母因此死亡,就成无间业。不针对特定对象而写,道理也一样。如果生起后悔,心想“会有很多人死”,就把那本书烧掉,或者处理到字迹无法辨认,就能脱罪。如果那本书是别人的,不管是否针对特定对象而写,只要放回拿取的地方,就能脱罪。如果是花钱买来的,就把书还给书的主人,把钱还给从他手里收钱的人,就能脱罪。如果许多人同一个心意,想“我们来写描述死亡的文字”,一个人爬上棕榈树割叶子,一个人拿过来,一个人做成书,一个人书写,如果是刺刻的书,一个人涂墨,涂好墨、把书准备好之后,大家把它放在会堂、店铺,或者任何有很多好奇看字的人聚集的地方。有人读了之后,即使只有一个人死亡,所有人都犯巴拉基格。如果很多人死亡,道理和前面说的一样。如果生起后悔,即使把那本书藏在箱子里,另一个人看到后拿出来再给很多人看,他们仍然不能脱罪。且不说箱子,即使把那本书扔进河里或海里,或者洗它,或者切成碎片,或者用火烧,只要在摩擦过、没洗净或没烧尽的叶子上字迹还能辨认,就不能脱罪。但如果处理到字迹无法辨认,就能脱罪。巴利
176. Lekhāsaṃvaṇṇanāya – lekhaṃ chindatīti paṇṇe vā potthake vā akkharāni likhati – ‘‘yo satthaṃ vā āharitvā papāte vā papatitvā aññehi vā aggippavesanaudakappavesanādīhi upāyehi marati, so idañcidañca labhatī’’ti vā ‘‘tassa dhammo hotī’’ti vāti. Etthāpi dukkaṭathullaccayā vuttanayeneva veditabbā. Uddissa likhite pana yaṃ uddissa likhitaṃ tasseva maraṇena pārājikaṃ. Bahū uddissa likhite yattakā maranti, tattakā pāṇātipātā. Mātāpitūnaṃ maraṇena ānantariyaṃ. Anuddissa likhitepi eseva nayo. ‘‘Bahū marantī’’ti vippaṭisāre uppanne taṃ potthakaṃ jhāpetvā vā yathā vā akkharāni na paññāyanti tathā katvā muccati. Sace so parassa potthako hoti, uddissa likhito vā hoti anuddissa likhito vā, gahitaṭṭhāne ṭhapetvā muccati. Sace mūlena kīto hoti, potthakassāmikānaṃ potthakaṃ, yesaṃ hatthato mūlaṃ gahitaṃ, tesaṃ mūlaṃ datvā muccati. Sace sambahulā ‘‘maraṇavaṇṇaṃ likhissāmā’’ti ekajjhāsayā hutvā eko tālarukkhaṃ ārohitvā paṇṇaṃ chindati, eko āharati, eko potthakaṃ karoti, eko likhati, eko sace kaṇṭakalekhā hoti, masiṃ makkheti, masiṃ makkhetvā taṃ potthakaṃ sajjetvā sabbeva sabhāyaṃ vā āpaṇe vā yattha vā pana lekhādassanakotūhalakā bahū sannipatanti, tattha ṭhapenti. Taṃ vācetvā sacepi eko marati, sabbesaṃ pārājikaṃ. Sace bahukā maranti, vuttasadisova nayo. Vippaṭisāre pana uppanne taṃ potthakaṃ sacepi mañjūsāyaṃ gopenti, añño ca taṃ disvā nīharitvā puna bahūnaṃ dasseti, neva muccanti. Tiṭṭhatu mañjūsā, sacepi taṃ potthakaṃ nadiyaṃ vā samudde vā khipanti vā dhovanti vā khaṇḍākhaṇḍaṃ vā chindanti, aggimhi vā jhāpenti, yāva saṅghaṭṭitepi duddhote vā dujjhāpite vā patte akkharāni paññāyanti, tāva na muccanti. Yathā pana akkharāni na paññāyanti tatheva kate muccantīti.
现在,为了说明固定杀生加行的分类,在已经说过的“坑”等论母解释中,“针对人而挖坑”是指:心里想着“某某掉进去就会死”,针对某个人,在他经常活动的地方挖一个坑。挖的时候,即使是在有生命的地上挖,因为是杀生的加行,每挖一下都犯恶作。如果所针对的那个人因此生起痛苦,就犯土喇咤亚;如果因此死亡,就犯巴拉基格。如果是别人掉进去死了,就无犯。如果不是针对特定的人,而是想“不管谁掉进去死了都行”而挖坑,那么有多少人掉进去死掉,就有多少次杀生。如果对象属于五无间业的情形,就构成无间业;如果对象属于构成土喇咤亚、巴吉帝亚罪的情形,就犯土喇咤亚、巴吉帝亚。巴利
Idāni thāvarapayogassa vibhāgadassanatthaṃ vuttesu opātādimātikāniddesesu manussaṃ uddissa opātaṃ khanatīti ‘‘itthannāmo patitvā marissatī’’ti kañci manussaṃ uddisitvā yattha so ekato vicarati, tattha āvāṭaṃ khanati, khanantassa tāva sacepi jātapathaviyā khanati, pāṇātipātassa payogattā payoge payoge dukkaṭaṃ. Yaṃ uddissa khanati, tassa dukkhuppattiyā thullaccayaṃ, maraṇena pārājikaṃ. Aññasmiṃ patitvā mate anāpatti. Sace anuddissa ‘‘yo koci marissatī’’ti khato hoti, yattakā patitvā maranti, tattakā pāṇātipātā. Ānantariyavatthūsu ca ānantariyaṃ thullaccayapācittiyavatthūsu thullaccayapācittiyāni.
这里涉及多种思。哪一种思构成巴拉基格呢?首先,《大注疏》中说:“挖一个坑,按深度和长宽挖好,量定尺寸,削平、清扫,在取出土筐时,那决定性的成事思就如同紧接道心之后的果心一样。即使过了一百年后,有人掉进去必定会死,也仍然是以那决定性的思构成巴拉基格。”《大跋车利耶注》和《略注》中则说:“当挖下第一锄时,若心想‘掉进这个坑就会死’,此时若有人失足掉进去死了,就构成巴拉基格。但持经长老们只取决定性的思。”巴利
Bahū tattha cetanā; katamāya pārājikaṃ hotīti? Mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ tāva vuttaṃ – ‘‘āvāṭaṃ gambhīrato ca āyāmavitthārato ca khanitvā pamāṇe ṭhapetvā tacchetvā puñchitvā paṃsupacchiṃ uddharantassa sanniṭṭhāpikā atthasādhakacetanā maggānantaraphalasadisā. Sacepi vassasatassa accayena patitvā avassaṃ maraṇakasatto hoti, sanniṭṭhāpakacetanāyameva pārājika’’nti. Mahāpaccariyaṃ pana saṅkhepaṭṭhakathāyañca – ‘‘imasmiṃ āvāṭe patitvā marissatīti ekasmimpi kuddālappahāre dinne sace koci tattha pakkhalito patitvā marati, pārājikameva. Suttantikattherā pana sanniṭṭhāpakacetanaṃ gaṇhantī’’ti vuttaṃ.
一个人命令另一个人说:“挖个坑,把某某人带来,推下去杀掉。”那人就把他推下去杀了,两个人都犯巴拉基格。如果命令者推另一个人下去杀了,或者命令的人自己掉下去死了,或者另一个人自己因法性掉下去死了,在所有这种情况下,根本造作者(命令者)都不构成违越,可以脱罪。如果他想:“某某人会把某某人带来,在这里杀掉”,那么挖坑时也是同样的道理。如果他想“想死的人会在这里死”而挖坑,死一个人就犯巴拉基格;死很多人就积集不善业;如果是父母死了就成无间业;如果涉及土喇咤亚和巴吉帝亚的情况,就犯相应的土喇咤亚和巴吉帝亚。巴利
Eko ‘‘opātaṃ khanitvā asukaṃ nāma ānetvā idha pātetvā mārehī’’ti aññaṃ āṇāpeti, so taṃ pātetvā māreti, ubhinnaṃ pārājikaṃ. Aññaṃ pātetvā māreti, sayaṃ patitvā marati, añño attano dhammatāya patitvā marati, sabbattha visaṅketo hoti, mūlaṭṭho muccati. ‘‘Asuko asukaṃ ānetvā idha māressatī’’ti khatepi eseva nayo. Maritukāmā idha marissantīti khanati, ekassa maraṇe pārājikaṃ. Bahunnaṃ maraṇe akusalarāsi , mātāpitūnaṃ maraṇe ānantariyaṃ, thullaccayapācittiyavatthūsu thullaccayapācittiyāni.
有人想:“不管是谁,只要想杀人,就会把人推到这里弄死。”于是挖了坑。如果有人被推下去弄死,死一个人就犯巴拉基格;死很多人就积下不善业;如果事情涉及杀父、杀母、杀阿拉汉这类无间业的对象,就犯无间业等罪。在这里,连阿拉汉也包括在内。但按前面那种说法,因为他们没有想死的心,所以不会掉下去,因此不算在内。在这两种情况下,如果是自己因法性而掉下去死了,就没有杀心。有人想:“不管是谁,只要想杀自己的仇人,就会把仇人推到这里弄死。”于是挖了坑。如果仇人们把仇人推下去弄死,死一个人就犯巴拉基格,死很多人就积下不善业;如果母亲、父亲或阿拉汉被仇人带到这里杀死,就犯无间业。如果他们自己因法性而掉下去死了,就没有杀心。巴利
‘‘Ye keci māretukāmā, te idha pātetvā māressantī’’ti khanati, tattha pātetvā mārenti , ekasmiṃ mate pārājikaṃ, bahūsu akusalarāsi, ānantariyādivatthūsu ānantariyādīni. Idheva arahantāpi saṅgahaṃ gacchanti. Purimanaye pana ‘‘tesaṃ maritukāmatāya patanaṃ natthī’’ti te na saṅgayhanti. Dvīsupi nayesu attano dhammatāya patitvā mate visaṅketo. ‘‘Ye keci attano verike ettha pātetvā māressantī’’ti khanati, tattha ca verikā verike pātetvā mārenti, ekasmiṃ mārite pārājikaṃ, bahūsu akusalarāsi, mātari vā pitari vā arahante vā verikehi ānetvā tattha mārite ānantariyaṃ. Attano dhammatāya patitvā matesu visaṅketo.
如果有人不指定具体对象,心里想的是“不管想死的、不想死的,想杀的、不想杀的,任何掉进来或被人推进来的人都会死”,就这样去挖陷阱,那么每死一个人,他就随着每一个人的死亡,相应地承受业报,并犯下相应的罪过。如果怀孕的女人掉进去,连同胎儿一起死了,就是两个杀生。如果只有胎儿死了,就是一个杀生。如果胎儿没死,母亲死了,也只是一个杀生。被盗贼追赶的人掉进去死了,挖陷阱的人犯巴拉基格。盗贼把人推到那里杀死,也是巴拉基格。把掉进去的人拖出来再杀死,也是巴拉基格。为什么?因为那个人是因为掉进陷阱这个行为而被抓住的。从陷阱里出来以后,因为同一个伤口而死,也是巴拉基格。过了很多年之后,同一个伤口再次发作而死,也是巴拉基格。因为掉进陷阱而生了病,后来又得了别的病,而陷阱导致的病更严重,即使最后是因为后来那个病而死,挖陷阱的人也不得脱罪。如果后来才生的病更严重,那个人因为那个病而死,就可以脱罪。如果两种病共同导致死亡,就不得脱罪。化生的人出现在陷阱里,出不来而死,也是巴拉基格。本来是为了杀人而挖的坑,夜叉之类的掉进去死了,没有罪。本来是为了夜叉之类而挖的坑,人或其他众生掉进去死了,也是同样的道理。不过,为了夜叉之类而挖坑的人,即使在挖的时候让它们感到痛苦,也只犯恶作。如果导致死亡,则根据对象不同,或者犯土喇咤亚,或者犯巴吉帝亚。不指定对象而挖的陷阱,有夜叉形状或饿鬼形状的掉进去,以畜生形状死去,以掉进去时的形状为准,所以是土喇咤亚——优波帝萨长老这样说。以死时的形状为准,所以是巴吉帝亚——普萨迭瓦长老这样说。以畜生形状掉进去,以夜叉或饿鬼形状死去,也是同样的道理。巴利
Yo pana ‘‘maritukāmā vā amaritukāmā vā māretukāmā vā amāretukāmā vā ye keci ettha patitā vā pātitā vā marissantī’’ti sabbathāpi anuddisseva khanati. Yo yo marati tassa tassa maraṇena yathānurūpaṃ kammañca phusati, āpattiñca āpajjati. Sace gabbhinī patitvā sagabbhā marati, dve pāṇātipātā. Gabbhoyeva vinassati, eko. Gabbho na vinassati, mātā marati, ekoyeva. Corehi anubaddho patitvā marati, opātakhanakasseva pārājikaṃ. Corā tattha pātetvā mārenti, pārājikameva. Tattha patitaṃ bahi nīharitvā mārenti, pārājikameva. Kasmā? Opāte patitappayogena gahitattā. Opātato nikkhamitvā teneva ābādhena marati, pārājikameva. Bahūni vassāni atikkamitvā puna kupitena tenevābādhena marati, pārājikameva. Opāte patanappaccayā uppannarogena gilānasseva añño rogo uppajjati, opātarogo balavataro hoti, tena matepi opātakhaṇako na muccati. Sace pacchā uppannarogo balavā hoti, tena mate muccati. Ubhohi mate na muccati. Opāte opapātikamanusso nibbattitvā uttarituṃ asakkonto marati, pārājikameva. Manussaṃ uddissa khate yakkhādīsu patitvā matesu anāpatti. Yakkhādayo uddissa khate manussādīsu marantesupi eseva nayo. Yakkhādayo uddissa khanantassa pana khananepi tesaṃ dukkhuppattiyampi dukkaṭameva. Maraṇe vatthuvasena thullaccayaṃ vā pācittiyaṃ vā. Anuddissa khate opāte yakkharūpena vā petarūpena vā patati, tiracchānarūpena marati, patanarūpaṃ pamāṇaṃ, tasmā thullaccayanti upatissatthero. Maraṇarūpaṃ pamāṇaṃ, tasmā pācittiyanti phussadevatthero. Tiracchānarūpena patitvā yakkhapetarūpena matepi eseva nayo.
挖陷阱的人把陷阱卖给别人,或者白白送人,不管是谁掉进去死了,由此产生的罪和业缚都归他自己。得到陷阱的人没有罪。如果得到陷阱的人想:“这样掉下去的人出不来,会死掉,或者得不到救助”,于是把陷阱挖得更深或更浅、更长或更短、更宽或更窄,那么两个人都犯下罪和业缚。如果因为想到“会有很多人死掉”而生起后悔,用土把陷阱填平,假如有人掉在填的土上死了,即使已经填平,最初挖陷阱的人仍然脱不了罪。天上下雨时那里变成泥泞,有人陷在泥里死了,也一样。树木倒下,或者风、雨水把泥土冲走,或者有人为了挖块根而在那里掘出一个坑,如果有人陷进去或掉进去死了,最初挖陷阱的人仍然脱不了罪。不过,如果在那块地方建一个大水池或池塘,或者建塔庙,或者种菩提树,或者建住所或车道,就能脱罪。当陷阱被牢固地填平,树木等的根互相缠结在一起,已经变成实心地面时,那时也能脱罪。即使河流冲过来把陷阱冲走了,这样也能脱罪。以上就是关于陷阱的论述。巴利
Opātakhanako opātaṃ aññassa vikkiṇāti vā mudhā vā deti, yo yo patitvā marati, tappaccayā tasseva āpatti ca kammabandho ca. Yena laddho so niddoso. Atha sopi ‘‘evaṃ patitā uttarituṃ asakkontā nassissanti, suuddharā vā na bhavissantī’’ti taṃ opātaṃ gambhīrataraṃ vā uttānataraṃ vā dīghataraṃ vā rassataraṃ vā vitthatataraṃ vā sambādhataraṃ vā karoti, ubhinnampi āpatti ca kammabandho ca. Bahū marantīti vippaṭisāre uppanne opātaṃ paṃsunā pūreti, sace koci paṃsumhi patitvā marati, pūretvāpi mūlaṭṭho na muccati. Deve vassante kaddamo hoti, tattha laggitvā matepi. Rukkho vā patanto vāto vā vassodakaṃ vā paṃsuṃ harati, kandamūlatthaṃ vā pathaviṃ khanantā tattha āvāṭaṃ karonti. Tattha sace koci laggitvā vā patitvā vā marati, mūlaṭṭho na muccati. Tasmiṃ pana okāse mahantaṃ taḷākaṃ vā pokkharaṇiṃ vā kāretvā cetiyaṃ vā patiṭṭhāpetvā bodhiṃ vā ropetvā āvāsaṃ vā sakaṭamaggaṃ vā kāretvā muccati. Yadāpi thiraṃ katvā pūrite opāte rukkhādīnaṃ mūlāni mūlehi saṃsibbitāni honti , jātapathavī jātā, tadāpi muccati. Sacepi nadī āgantvā opātaṃ harati, evampi muccatīti. Ayaṃ tāva opātakathā.
不过,对于陷阱这一类顺理成章、看起来也很妥当的捕猎装置,只要有人放下套索,心想“众生会在这里被绑住而死”,那就应当知道:对于那些注定会被绑住的众生,在刚放手的那一刻,就涉及巴拉基格、无间罪、土喇咤亚、巴吉帝亚这些罪。
如果是为了特定对象而设置,结果被绑住的却是那对象以外的人,那就没有犯戒。套索无论是连同本钱一起给出去,还是白白送人,业力上的束缚都只归最初设置的人。
如果拿到套索的人把松脱的套索重新架好,或者看见有人从旁边走过,就筑起围栏把人引到正面来,或者把套索杆立得更硬,或者把套索绳绑得更紧,或者把桩子钉得更牢,那两个人就都解脱不了。
如果设置者生起后悔,把套索解下来就走了,别人看见后又重新架设,结果被绑住的众生一个接一个死去,最初设置的人仍然解脱不了。巴利
Opātasseva pana anulomesu pāsādīsupi yo tāva pāsaṃ oḍḍeti ‘‘ettha bajjhitvā sattā marissantī’’ti avassaṃ bajjhanakasattānaṃ vasena hatthā muttamatte pārājikānantariyathullaccayapācittiyāni veditabbāni. Uddissa kate yaṃ uddissa oḍḍito, tato aññesaṃ bandhane anāpatti. Pāse mūlena vā mudhā vā dinnepi mūlaṭṭhasseva kammabandho. Sace yena laddho so uggalitaṃ vā pāsaṃ saṇṭhapeti, passena vā gacchante disvā vatiṃ katvā sammukhe paveseti, thaddhataraṃ vā pāsayaṭṭhiṃ ṭhapeti, daḷhataraṃ vā pāsarajjuṃ bandhati, thirataraṃ vā khāṇukaṃ vā ākoṭeti, ubhopi na muccanti. Sace vippaṭisāre uppanne pāsaṃ uggalāpetvā gacchati, taṃ disvā puna aññe saṇṭhapenti, baddhā baddhā maranti, mūlaṭṭho na muccati.
如果那根套索杆不是他自己做的,那么把它放回被拿取的位置,他就解脱了。砍断在那里长出来的杆子,他就解脱了。但如果是他自己做的杆子,即使他加以保护,也还是不能解脱。因为如果别人拿了那根杆子去设置套索,众生因此而死,最初设置的人就不能解脱。如果他把那根杆子烧成炭火后扔掉,众生被那炭火打到而死,他也还是不能解脱。只有彻底烧尽或彻底毁掉,才能解脱。套索绳如果是别人搓的,把它放回被拿取的位置,他就解脱了。如果拿到绳子后把搓成的部分拆开,或者拿到纤维后把搓成的部分一条条拆散,他就解脱了。但如果是他自己从树林里取来纤维搓成的,即使加以保护,也不能解脱。只有彻底烧尽或彻底毁掉,才能解脱。巴利
Sace pana tena pāsayaṭṭhi sayaṃ akatā hoti, gahitaṭṭhāne ṭhapetvā muccati. Tatthajātakayaṭṭhiṃ chinditvā muccati. Sayaṃ katayaṭṭhiṃ pana gopentopi na muccati. Yadi hi taṃ añño gaṇhitvā pāsaṃ saṇṭhapeti, tappaccayā marantesu mūlaṭṭho na muccati. Sace taṃ jhāpetvā alātaṃ katvā chaḍḍeti, tena alātena pahāraṃ laddhā marantesupi na muccati. Sabbaso pana jhāpetvā vā nāsetvā vā muccati, pāsarajjumpi aññehi ca vaṭṭitaṃ gahitaṭṭhāne ṭhapetvā muccati. Rajjuke labhitvā sayaṃ vaṭṭitaṃ ubbaṭṭetvā vāke labhitvā vaṭṭitaṃ hīraṃ hīraṃ katvā muccati. Araññato pana sayaṃ vāke āharitvā vaṭṭitaṃ gopentopi na muccati. Sabbaso pana jhāpetvā vā nāsetvā vā muccati.
布置压杀陷阱时,把压板架在四根支柱上,再放上石头,每做一步都犯恶作罪。等全部布置完毕,手一松开的那一刹那,就根据必定会被压死的众生的情况,按照有指定对象和没有指定对象等相应情形,应当知道构成巴拉基格等罪。压杀陷阱不管是有人正式布施的,还是随便放置的,业的责任都只落在最初布置的人身上。如果接受陷阱的人把掉下来的石头重新搬上去,或者再放上别的石头让它变得更重,或者看见众生从旁边经过就筑起围栏,把众生引进压杀陷阱里,这两个人都不能脱罪。即使他起了悔意,把压杀陷阱推倒后离开,别人看见后又重新布置好,最初布置的人仍然不能脱罪。不过,就石头而言,要把它放回原来拿取的位置才能脱罪;压杀板的支柱,则按照套索杆那一节所说的方法,放回原来拿取的位置,或者烧掉,才能脱罪。巴利
Adūhalaṃ sajjento catūsu pādesu adūhalamañcaṃ ṭhapetvā pāsāṇe āropeti, payoge payoge dukkaṭaṃ. Sabbasajjaṃ katvā hatthato muttamatte avassaṃ ajjhottharitabbakasattānaṃ vasena uddissakānuddissakānurūpena pārājikādīni veditabbāni. Adūhale mūlena vā mudhā vā dinnepi mūlaṭṭhasseva kammabaddho. Sace yena laddhaṃ so patitaṃ vā ukkhipati, aññepi pāsāṇe āropetvā garukataraṃ vā karoti, passena vā gacchante disvā vatiṃ katvā adūhale paveseti, ubhopi na muccanti. Sacepi vippaṭisāre uppanne adūhalaṃ pātetvā gacchati, taṃ disvā añño saṇṭhapeti, mūlaṭṭho na muccati. Pāsāṇe pana gahitaṭṭhāne ṭhapetvā adūhalapāde ca pāsayaṭṭhiyaṃ vuttanayena gahitaṭṭhāne vā ṭhapetvā jhāpetvā vā muccati.
把刺桩竖起来的人,即使已经全部准备就绪,只要一松手,众生一掉到桩尖上就必定会死,这时就按所指向或未指向的众生的情况,相应地判定巴拉基格等罪。刺桩不管是有人出了钱雇人做的,还是随便弄来的,业的责任都只落在最初设置的人身上。如果得到这根刺桩的人想“让他们一下子就死”,就把它削得更尖;想“让他们死得痛苦”,就把它弄钝;觉得“太高了”,就把它放低;觉得“太低了”,就把它升高重新竖起来;或者把弯的弄直、把太直的弄弯、让它稍微倾斜——这样双方都不得脱罪。但如果他觉得“位置不对”,就把它移到别的地方,而这根刺桩从一开始就是为了杀人而特意寻找制作的,那最初设置的人仍不得脱罪;如果不是特意寻找,只是随手拿到现成的就竖起来,那最初设置的人可以脱罪。如果生起了后悔心,就按照套索杆那段所说的方式,把它放回原来拿取的位置,或者烧掉,这样就能脱罪。巴利
Sūlaṃ ropentassāpi sabbasajjaṃ katvā hatthato muttamatte sūlamukhe patitvā avassaṃ maraṇakasattānaṃ vasena uddissānuddissānurūpato pārājikādīni veditabbāni. Sūle mūlena vā mudhā vā dinnepi mūlaṭṭhasseva kammabaddho. Sace yena laddhaṃ so ‘‘ekappahāreneva marissantī’’ti tikhiṇataraṃ vā karoti, ‘‘dukkhaṃ marissantī’’ti kuṇṭhataraṃ vā karoti, ‘‘ucca’’nti sallakkhetvā nīcataraṃ vā ‘‘nīca’’nti sallakkhetvā uccataraṃ vā puna ropeti, vaṅkaṃ vā ujukaṃ atiujukaṃ vā īsakaṃ poṇaṃ karoti, ubhopi na muccanti. Sace pana ‘‘aṭṭhāne ṭhita’’nti aññasmiṃ ṭhāne ṭhapeti, taṃ ce māraṇatthāya ādito pabhuti pariyesitvā kataṃ hoti, mūlaṭṭho na muccati. Apariyesitvā pana katameva labhitvā ropite mūlaṭṭho muccati. Vippaṭisāre uppanne pāsayaṭṭhiyaṃ vuttanayena gahitaṭṭhāne vā ṭhapetvā jhāpetvā vā muccati.
177 177. 在“在倚靠物上放刀”这一条里,所谓倚靠物,指的是日常经常使用的东西:床、椅子、靠板,或者白天坐着时靠的柱子、那里原本生长的树,或者经行时站着倚靠的树、靠板——所有这些,因为可以倚靠,所以叫倚靠物。在这样的倚靠物上,以能刺伤或砍伤倚靠者的方式,放置斧头、凿子、刀、锥、刺等任何一种刀,犯恶作。在经常使用的地方,有人没有戒心地坐下、躺下或倚靠,因为碰到刀而生起痛苦,犯土喇咤亚;如果因此死亡,犯巴拉基格。如果另一个与他有仇的比丘在寺院里巡视时看到了,心想“这大概是为了杀这个人而放的,好啊,让他好好死吧”,随喜地走开,犯恶作。但如果那个人也在那里,心想“这样做会更好”,把刀磨得更锋利等等,做了某些加工,那他也犯巴拉基格。但如果他认为“位置不对”,把刀拔出来放到别处,如果是为了同一个目的而特意制作放置的,最初放置的人仍然不能脱罪;如果只是把现成的拿来放上去,最初放置的人就脱罪了。如果把那把移走,另外放一把更锋利的,最初放置的人就脱罪了。巴利
177. Apassene satthaṃ vāti ettha apassenaṃ nāma niccaparibhogo mañco vā pīṭhaṃ vā apassenaphalakaṃ vā divāṭṭhāne nisīdantassa apassenakatthambho vā tatthajātakarukkho vā caṅkame apassāya tiṭṭhantassa ālambanarukkho vā ālambanaphalakaṃ vā sabbampetaṃ apassayanīyaṭṭhena apassenaṃ nāma; tasmiṃ apassene yathā apassayantaṃ vijjhati vā chindati vā tathā katvā vāsipharasusattiārakaṇṭakādīnaṃ aññataraṃ satthaṃ ṭhapeti, dukkaṭaṃ. Dhuvaparibhogaṭṭhāne nirāsaṅkassa nisīdato vā nipajjato vā apassayantassa vā satthasamphassapaccayā dukkhuppattiyā thullaccayaṃ, maraṇena pārājikaṃ. Taṃ ce aññopi tassa veribhikkhu vihāracārikaṃ caranto disvā ‘‘imassa maññe maraṇatthāya idaṃ nikhittaṃ, sādhu suṭṭhu maratū’’ti abhinandanto gacchati, dukkaṭaṃ. Sace pana sopi tattha ‘‘evaṃ kate sukataṃ bhavissatī’’ti tikhiṇatarādikaraṇena kiñci kammaṃ karoti, tassāpi pārājikaṃ. Sace pana ‘‘aṭṭhāne ṭhita’’nti uddharitvā aññasmiṃ ṭhāne ṭhapeti tadatthameva katvā ṭhapite mūlaṭṭho na muccati. Pākatikaṃ labhitvā ṭhapitaṃ hoti, muccati. Taṃ apanetvā aññaṃ tikhiṇataraṃ ṭhapeti mūlaṭṭho muccateva.
在涂毒这件事上,一直到随喜死亡为止都犯恶作,方法也是这样。不过,如果他想“这毒圈太小”,就把它做大;或者觉得“太大了”,就把它做小;或者把薄的涂厚、厚的涂薄;或者用火加热后,把它在下面或上面移动,那也犯巴拉基格。如果他认为“这放的位置不对”,就把毒全部刮掉、擦干净,再放到别的地方:如果是他自己配药做的,最初放置的人就不得脱罪;如果不是他自己做的,就得脱罪。不过,如果他觉得“这毒太少了”,又拿来别的毒加进去,众生因为谁的毒而死,谁就犯巴拉基格。如果是因为两个人的毒而死,两个人都犯巴拉基格。如果他认为“这毒没有毒”,就把那毒拿走,只放自己的毒,那么那个人犯巴拉基格,最初放置的人得脱罪。巴利
Visamakkhanepi yāva maraṇābhinandane dukkaṭaṃ tāva eseva nayo. Sace pana sopi khuddakaṃ visamaṇḍalanti sallakkhetvā mahantataraṃ vā karoti , mahantaṃ vā ‘‘atirekaṃ hotī’’ti khuddakaṃ karoti, tanukaṃ vā bahalaṃ; bahalaṃ vā tanukaṃ karoti, agginā tāpetvā heṭṭhā vā upari vā sañcāreti, tassāpi pārājikaṃ. ‘‘Idaṃ aṭhāne ṭhita’’nti sabbameva tacchetvā puñchitvā aññasmiṃ ṭhāne ṭhapeti, attanā bhesajjāni yojetvā kate mūlaṭṭho na muccati , attanā akate muccati. Sace pana so ‘‘idaṃ visaṃ atiparitta’’nti aññampi ānetvā pakkhipati, yassa visena marati, tassa pārājikaṃ. Sace ubhinnampi santakena marati, ubhinnampi pārājikaṃ. ‘‘Idaṃ visaṃ nibbisa’’nti taṃ apanetvā attano visameva ṭhapeti, tasseva pārājikaṃ mūlaṭṭho muccati.
把床或椅子弄得不结实,是指砍断横档下面的部分,或者割断那些用藤条、绳子绑着的部分,只留下一点点,然后在下面放上武器,心想“他掉到这里就会死”。对于靠板之类的木板,乃至经行道旁扶手木板的末端,砍断外侧那一边,在下面放上武器;或者把床、椅子、靠板搬到坑洞等地方放好,让人只要一坐上去或一靠上去就会掉下去;或者坑洞等地方有通行的桥,把它弄得不结实。这样做的时候,在制作过程中犯恶作。对方因此产生痛苦,犯土喇咤亚;如果死了,犯巴拉基格。把比丘带到坑洞等的边缘站着,心想“他看到后因恐惧而颤抖,就会掉下去死”,犯恶作。他就在那里掉下去,产生痛苦时犯土喇咤亚,死亡时犯巴拉基格。自己推落,或让别人推落,或别人没被指使而自己推落,或非人推落,或被风吹落,或因自身原因掉落,一切情况下,只要导致死亡,都犯巴拉基格。为什么?因为是由于他的操作,那人才站在坑洞等的边缘。巴利
Dubbalaṃ vā karotīti mañcapīṭhaṃ aṭaniyā heṭṭhābhāge chinditvā vidalehi vā rajjukehi vā yehi vītaṃ hoti, te vā chinditvā appāvasesameva katvā heṭṭhā āvudhaṃ nikkhipati ‘‘ettha patitvā marissatī’’ti. Apassenaphalakādīnampi caṅkame ālambanarukkhaphalakapariyosānānaṃ parabhāgaṃ chinditvā heṭṭhā āvudhaṃ nikkhipati, sobbhādīsu mañcaṃ vā pīṭhaṃ vā apassenaphalakaṃ vā ānetvā ṭhapeti, yathā tattha nisinnamatto vā apassitamatto vā patati, sobbhādīsu vā sañcaraṇasetu hoti, taṃ dubbalaṃ karoti; evaṃ karontassa karaṇe dukkaṭaṃ. Itarassa dukkhuppattiyā thullaccayaṃ, maraṇe pārājikaṃ. Bhikkhuṃ ānetvā sobbhādīnaṃ taṭe ṭhapeti ‘‘disvā bhayena kampento patitvā marissatī’’ti dukkaṭaṃ. So tattheva patati, dukkhuppattiyā thullaccayaṃ, maraṇe pārājikaṃ. Sayaṃ vā pāteti, aññena vā pātāpeti, añño avutto vā attano dhammatāya pāteti, amanusso pāteti, vātappahārena patati, attano dhammatāya patatti, sabbattha maraṇe pārājikaṃ. Kasmā? Tassa payogena sobbhāditaṭe ṭhitattā.
所谓“放置”,就是放在近处。这里,如果有人用“用这把刀死掉的人能得到财物”这类说法来赞叹死亡,或者劝人说“想死的就用这个去死,想杀人的就用这个去杀”,然后把刀放在那里,那么他这样做放置时就犯了恶作。如果想死的人用那把刀伤害自己,或者想杀人的人用它伤害别人,这两种情况下,只要对方因此产生痛苦,放置刀的人就犯土喇咤亚;如果导致死亡,就犯巴拉基格。如果没有针对特定的人而放置,导致许多人死亡,那就是不善业的累积。在巴拉基格等事中,就分别犯巴拉基格等罪。如果生起了追悔,把刀放回原来拿取的地方,就得以解脱。如果是买来的刀,应当把刀归还原主,把钱还给那些从他手里收钱的人,这样才得以解脱。如果拿了铁块、犁头或锄头让人打成刀,应当把所拿的那件器具恢复原样,这样才得以解脱。如果拿了锄头让人打成刀,却把锄头毁掉改打成犁头,即使有人被犁头击中而死,他也不能从杀生罪中解脱。但如果是为了专门放置而收集铁让人打造,那就必须用砂石把它磨成粉末,撒散之后才得以解脱。即使像劝死书那样,是由许多人共同发心制作而成,其业缚的判断也应当依照书中所说的方式来理解。这个道理也适用于矛和棍棒。棍棒的判断与套索杖相同。石头也是如此。刀类则与刀相同。至于毒,放置毒的人应当根据事由、是否针对特定人等相应情况,在巴拉基格等事中分别犯巴拉基格等罪。如果是买来放置的,依照前面的方法恢复原状后就得以解脱。如果是自己用药物调配的,只要使它不再成为毒,就得以解脱。绳索的判断与套索绳相同。巴利
Upanikkhipanaṃ nāma samīpe nikkhipanaṃ. Tattha ‘‘yo iminā asinā mato so dhanaṃ vā labhatī’’tiādinā nayena maraṇavaṇṇaṃ vā saṃvaṇṇetvā ‘‘iminā maraṇatthikā marantu, māraṇatthikā mārentū’’ti vā vatvā asiṃ upanikkhipati, tassa upanikkhipane dukkaṭaṃ. Maritukāmo vā tena attānaṃ paharatu , māretukāmo vā aññaṃ paharatu, ubhayathāpi parassa dukkhuppattiyā upanikkhepakassa thullaccayaṃ, maraṇe pārājikaṃ. Anuddissa nikkhitte bahūnaṃ maraṇe akusalarāsi. Pārājikādivatthūsu pārājikādīni. Vippaṭisāre uppanne asiṃ gahitaṭṭhāne ṭhapetvā muccati. Kiṇitvā gahito hoti, asissāmikānaṃ asiṃ, yesaṃ hatthato mūlaṃ gahitaṃ, tesaṃ mūlaṃ datvā muccati. Sace lohapiṇḍiṃ vā phālaṃ vā kudālaṃ vā gahetvā asi kārāpito hoti, yaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ gahetvā kārito, tadeva katvā muccati. Sace kudālaṃ gahetvā kāritaṃ vināsetvā phālaṃ karoti, phālena pahāraṃ labhitvā marantesupi pāṇātipātato na muccati. Sace pana lohaṃ samuṭṭhāpetvā upanikkhipanatthameva kārito hoti, arena ghaṃsitvā cuṇṇavicuṇṇaṃ katvā vippakiṇṇe muccati. Sacepi saṃvaṇṇanāpotthako viya bahūhi ekajjhāsayehi kato hoti, potthake vuttanayeneva kammabandhavinicchayo veditabbo. Esa nayo sattibheṇḍīsu. Laguḷe pāsayaṭṭhisadiso vinicchayo. Tathā pāsāṇe. Satthe asisadisova. Visaṃ vāti visaṃ upanikkhipantassa vatthuvasena uddissānuddissānurūpato pārājikādivatthūsu pārājikādīni veditabbāni. Kiṇitvā ṭhapite purimanayena paṭipākatikaṃ katvā muccati. Sayaṃ bhesajjehi yojite avisaṃ katvā muccati. Rajjuyā pāsarajjusadisova vinicchayo.
关于药物:如果有个比丘,对怀有敌意的比丘,在他得了热病或者不相宜的病症时,怀着让他死的心思,把酥油之类本来不适宜的东西说成是适宜的而给他,或者给他任何其他的块茎、根、果实等,这样施药就犯恶作。如果对方因此产生痛苦,犯土喇咤亚;如果导致死亡,犯巴拉基格。如果所缘的事属于无间业,就应当知道是无间罪。巴利
Bhesajje – yo bhikkhu veribhikkhussa pajjarake vā visabhāgaroge vā uppanne asappāyānipi sappiādīni sappāyānīti maraṇādhippāyo deti, aññaṃ vā kiñci kandamūlaphalaṃ tassa evaṃ bhesajjadāne dukkaṭaṃ. Parassa dukkhuppattiyaṃ maraṇe ca thullaccayapārājikāni, ānantariyavatthumhi ānantariyanti veditabbaṃ.
178 178. 关于施加色相:所谓“施加”,就是把对方不喜欢的色相放到他跟前,或者自己现出夜叉、饿鬼等形象站在那里。只要做了这个施加的动作,就犯恶作。对方看到那个色相后生起恐惧,犯土喇咤亚;如果因此死了,犯巴拉基格。但如果那个色相正好让某个人喜欢,而那人因为得不到而憔悴致死,就不犯。对令人喜欢的色相,也是同样的道理。不过在这里特别要说的是:对女人现男人之相,对男人现女人之相,打扮好之后施加,只让对方看一眼,不让对方久看。对方因为得不到而憔悴致死,犯巴拉基格;如果是被吓死的,就不犯。但如果不加分别,不管是吓死还是得不到而死,心里只想着“只要让他看见就会死”而施加色相,那么对方无论是被吓死还是憔悴而死,都犯巴拉基格。用同样的方法,声的施加等也应该了解。这里只是说:非人的声音等能引起惊恐的,是不令人喜欢的声音;对男人来说,女人的声音、美妙的天乐声等能令心生喜悦的,是令人喜欢的声音。在雪山,毒树的根等气味和尸体的气味是不令人喜欢的气味;黑沉香根等气味是令人喜欢的气味。令人厌恶的根味等是不令人喜欢的味;不令人厌恶的根味等是令人喜欢的味。毒触、大麻风触等是不令人喜欢的触;中国丝绸、天鹅绒、棉花绒等触是令人喜欢的触。应当这样了解。巴利
178. Rūpūpahāre – upasaṃharatīti paraṃ vā amanāparūpaṃ tassa samīpe ṭhapeti, attanā vā yakkhapetādivesaṃ gahetvā tiṭṭhati, tassa upasaṃhāramatte dukkaṭaṃ. Parassa taṃ rūpaṃ disvā bhayuppattiyaṃ thullaccayaṃ, maraṇe pārājikaṃ. Sace pana tadeva rūpaṃ ekaccassa manāpaṃ hoti, alābhakena ca sussitvā marati, visaṅketo. Manāpiyepi eseva nayo. Tattha pana visesena itthīnaṃ purisarūpaṃ purisānañca itthirūpaṃ manāpaṃ taṃ alaṅkaritvā upasaṃharati, diṭṭhamattakameva karoti, aticiraṃ passitumpi na deti, itaro alābhakena sussitvā marati, pārājikaṃ. Sace uttasitvā marati , visaṅketo. Atha pana uttasitvā vā alābhakena vāti avicāretvā ‘‘kevalaṃ passitvā marissatī’’ti upasaṃharati, uttasitvā vā sussitvā vā mate pārājikameva. Etenevūpāyena saddūpahārādayopi veditabbā. Kevalañhettha amanussasaddādayo utrāsajanakā amanāpasaddā, purisānaṃ itthisaddamadhuragandhabbasaddādayo cittassādakarā manāpasaddā. Himavante visarukkhānaṃ mūlādigandhā kuṇapagandhā ca amanāpagandhā, kāḷānusārīmūlagandhādayo manāpagandhā . Paṭikūlamūlarasādayo amanāparasā, appaṭikūlamūlarasādayo manāparasā. Visaphassamahākacchuphassādayo amanāpaphoṭṭhabbā, cīnapaṭahaṃsapupphatūlikaphassādayo manāpaphoṭṭhabbāti veditabbā.
以法施加:这里的“法”要理解为教法。或者,从教法宣说的角度来看,地狱和天界中受苦与享福的差别,本身就是以法为所缘。所谓“地狱众生”,是指戒行毁坏、造了恶业、应当生到地狱的众生,为他讲说五种捆绑、刑罚等地狱的事。他听了之后恐惧而死,说法者犯巴拉基格。但如果他听了之后,因为自身的法性而死,就无犯。如果是为了让他“听了这个之后,就不再造、会远离、会停止这类恶业”而讲说地狱的事,他听了之后恐惧而死,无犯。所谓“天界的事”,是指天界舞者、演员等以及欢喜园等种种福报的事;他听了之后,心向天界,想赶快得到那些福报,就用持刀自杀、服毒、断食、阻断呼吸等方式让自己受苦,说法者犯土喇咤亚;如果死了,犯巴拉基格。但如果他听了之后,还是活到寿命尽时,因为自身的法性而死,就无犯。如果是为了让他“听了这个之后,会去修福德”而说,他听了之后心生向往而命终,无犯。巴利
Dhammūpahāre – dhammoti desanādhammo veditabbo. Desanāvasena vā niraye ca sagge ca vipattisampattibhedaṃ dhammārammaṇameva. Nerayikassāti bhinnasaṃvarassa katapāpassa niraye nibbattanārahassa sattassa pañcavidhabandhanakammakaraṇādinirayakathaṃ katheti. Taṃ ce sutvā so uttasitvā marati, kathikassa pārājikaṃ. Sace pana so sutvāpi attano dhammatāya marati, anāpatti. ‘‘Idaṃ sutvā evarūpaṃ pāpaṃ na karissati oramissati viramissatī’’ti nirayakathaṃ katheti, taṃ sutvā itaro uttasitvā marati, anāpatti. Saggakathanti devanāṭakādīnaṃ nandanavanādīnañca sampattikathaṃ; taṃ sutvā itaro saggādhimutto sīghaṃ taṃ sampattiṃ pāpuṇitukāmo satthāharaṇavisakhādanaāhārupaccheda-assāsapassāsasannirundhanādīhi dukkhaṃ uppādeti, kathikassa thullaccayaṃ, marati pārājikaṃ. Sace pana so sutvāpi yāvatāyukaṃ ṭhatvā attano dhammatāya marati, anāpatti . ‘‘Imaṃ sutvā puññāni karissatī’’ti katheti, taṃ sutvā itaro adhimutto kālaṃkaroti, anāpatti.
179 179. 关于“告知”——“被问才说”,是指有人这样问:“尊者,人死后怎样才能得到财富,或者投生到天界?”被这样问到时,他才说。巴利
179. Ācikkhanāyaṃ – puṭṭho bhaṇatīti ‘‘bhante kathaṃ mato dhanaṃ vā labhati sagge vā upapajjatī’’ti evaṃ pucchito bhaṇati.
在教导的章节里说“没有被问”:意思是,没有被这样问,就自己主动开口说了。巴利
Anusāsaniyaṃ – apuṭṭhoti evaṃ apucchito sāmaññeva bhaṇati.
暗示业和相业,应当依照不与取这一节里已经讲过的方式来了知。巴利
Saṅketakammanimittakammāni adinnādānakathāyaṃ vuttanayeneva veditabbāni.
像这样从各种角度说明了犯戒的类别之后,现在为了说明不犯戒的类别,而说“无犯,非故意”等。其中,“非故意”是指没有怀着“用这个手段我要杀死这个人”的意图。因为像这样没有存心,以所做的事即使导致他人死亡,也无犯,而且将会说“比丘非故意者无犯”。“不知者”是指不知道“用这个手段这个人将会死”,以这样的手段即使导致他人死亡,也无犯,而且将在毒食钵的事例中说“比丘不知者无犯”。“无杀意者”是指不希望对方死。即使以某种手段导致他人死亡,如果他没有杀意,也无犯,而且将会说“比丘无杀意者无犯”。疯狂等情况,和前面所说的一样。但在这里,最初犯戒的是那些互相夺命的比丘,他们无犯。其余赞叹死亡等的人,则有犯。巴利
Evaṃ nānappakārato āpattibhedaṃ dassetvā idāni anāpattibhedaṃ dassento ‘‘anāpatti asañciccā’’tiādimāha. Tattha asañciccāti ‘‘iminā upakkamena imaṃ māremī’’ti acetetvā. Evañhi acetetvā katena upakkamena pare matepi anāpatti, vakkhati ca ‘‘anāpatti bhikkhu asañciccā’’ti. Ajānantassāti ‘‘iminā ayaṃ marissatī’’ti ajānantassa upakkamena pare matepi anāpatti, vakkhati ca visagatapiṇḍapātavatthusmiṃ ‘‘anāpatti bhikkhu ajānantassā’’ti. Namaraṇādhippāyassāti maraṇaṃ anicchantassa. Yena hi upakkamena paro marati, tena upakkamena tasmiṃ māritepi namaraṇādhippāyassa anāpatti. Vakkhati ca ‘‘anāpatti bhikkhu namaraṇādhippāyassā’’ti. Ummattakādayo pubbe vuttanayā eva. Idha pana ādikammikā aññamaññaṃ jīvitā voropitabhikkhū, tesaṃ anāpatti. Avasesānaṃ maraṇavaṇṇasaṃvaṇṇanakādīnaṃ āpattiyevāti.
关于等起等项:这条学处有三种等起——从身与心、语与心、身语与心而生起。是造作、想解脱、有心、世间罪、身业、语业、不善心、苦受。即使国王登上宝座,正享受着王权之乐,当有人来报“大王,盗贼已捉到”,他笑着说“去,把他杀了”,也应当知道他是以忧俱之心而说的。然而,因为与乐混杂,又不是持续生起,所以凡夫难以了知这一点。巴利
Samuṭṭhānādīsu – idaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ tisamuṭṭhānaṃ; kāyacittato ca vācācittato ca kāyavācācittato ca samuṭṭhāti. Kiriyaṃ, saññāvimokkhaṃ, sacittakaṃ, lokavajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, akusalacittaṃ, dukkhavedanaṃ. Sacepi hi sirisayanaṃ ārūḷho rajjasampattisukhaṃ anubhavanto rājā ‘‘coro deva ānīto’’ti vutte ‘‘gacchatha naṃ mārethā’’ti hasamānova bhaṇati, domanassacitteneva bhaṇatīti veditabbo. Sukhavokiṇṇattā pana anuppabandhābhāvā ca dujjānametaṃ puthujjanehīti.
已裁决事例的注释巴利
Vinītavatthuvaṇṇanā
180 在裁决事例的第一则中,“出于悲悯”是指:那些比丘看到那位比丘遭受重病的巨大痛苦,生起了悲悯,心想:“你具戒,已作善业,为什么临死还害怕呢?具戒者生天,不就是只差一死而已吗?”他们就这样实际上盼着他死,却不知道自己是在盼他死,于是赞叹死亡。那位比丘也因为他们的赞叹而断绝了饮食,中途就命终了。因此他们犯了戒。不过,从世俗表达的角度说,才说他们“出于悲悯而赞叹死亡”。所以,如今有智慧的比丘也不应这样对生病的比丘赞叹死亡。因为如果那病人听了他的赞叹后,以断绝饮食等方法,哪怕寿命只剩一个速行心的刹那,中途死去,就是被这位比丘杀死的。应当按这个道理给予教诫:“具戒者证得道果并不稀奇,所以不要贪著住处等,应当把心念安立在佛、法、僧和身体上,在作意中不放逸。”即使赞叹了死亡,如果对方并没有因为这番赞叹而采取任何行动,只是随自己的法性,随寿命、随业力因缘而死,那么赞叹者不因为这个原因而犯戒。巴利
180. Vinītavatthukathāsu paṭhamavatthusmiṃ – kāruññenāti te bhikkhū tassa mahantaṃ gelaññadukkhaṃ disvā kāruññaṃ uppādetvā ‘‘sīlavā tvaṃ katakusalo, kasmā mīyamāno bhāyasi, nanu sīlavato saggo nāma maraṇamattapaṭibaddhoyevā’’ti evaṃ maraṇatthikāva hutvā maraṇatthikabhāvaṃ ajānantā maraṇavaṇṇaṃ saṃvaṇṇesuṃ. Sopi bhikkhu tesaṃ saṃvaṇṇanāya āhārupacchedaṃ katvā antarāva kālamakāsi. Tasmā āpattiṃ āpannā. Vohāravasena pana vuttaṃ ‘‘kāruññena maraṇavaṇṇaṃ saṃvaṇṇesu’’nti. Tasmā idānipi paṇḍitena bhikkhunā gilānassa bhikkhuno evaṃ maraṇavaṇṇo na saṃvaṇṇetabbo. Sace hi tassa saṃvaṇṇanaṃ sutvā āhārūpacchedādinā upakkamena ekajavanavārāvasesepi āyusmiṃ antarā kālaṃkaroti, imināva mārito hoti. Iminā pana nayena anusiṭṭhi dātabbā – ‘‘sīlavato nāma anacchariyā maggaphaluppatti, tasmā vihārādīsu āsattiṃ akatvā buddhagataṃ dhammagataṃ saṅghagataṃ kāyagatañca satiṃ upaṭṭhapetvā manasikāre appamādo kātabbo’’ti. Maraṇavaṇṇe ca saṃvaṇṇitepi yo tāya saṃvaṇṇanāya kañci upakkamaṃ akatvā attano dhammatāya yathāyunā yathānusandhināva marati, tappaccayā saṃvaṇṇako āpattiyā na kāretabboti.
在第二个事例中,“诸比丘,不应不观察而……”这里,什么样的座位应该观察,什么样的座位不应该观察?如果只是光秃秃的座位,没有铺任何垫子,或者来的人站着亲眼看着时当场铺上的,那就不需要观察,可以坐。如果人们亲手摸过之后说“尊者,请坐这里”,那也可以坐。即使是最先来的人已经坐下,后来的人向上或向下移动,也没有观察的必要。如果用薄布盖着,还能看见座面,那也没有观察的必要。但是,如果事先就用毯子、毛毯等铺好了,那就应该用手摸一摸、确认之后再坐。不过《大护持》中说:“即使是用厚布铺的,如果看不出褶皱,也说不需要观察。”巴利
Dutiyavatthusmiṃ – na ca bhikkhave appaṭivekkhitvāti ettha kīdisaṃ āsanaṃ paṭivekkhitabbaṃ , kīdisaṃ na paṭivekkhitabbaṃ? Yaṃ suddhaṃ āsanameva hoti apaccattharaṇakaṃ, yañca āgantvā ṭhitānaṃ passataṃyeva attharīyati, taṃ napaccavekkhitabbaṃ , nisīdituṃ vaṭṭati. Yampi manussā sayaṃ hatthena akkamitvā ‘‘idha bhante nisīdathā’’ti denti, tasmimpi vaṭṭati. Sacepi paṭhamamevāgantvā nisinnā pacchā uddhaṃ vā adho vā saṅkamanti, paccavekkhaṇakiccaṃ natthi. Yampi tanukena vatthena yathā talaṃ dissati, evaṃ paṭicchannaṃ hoti, tasmimpi paccavekkhaṇakiccaṃ natthi. Yaṃ pana paṭikacceva pāvārakojavādīhi atthataṃ hoti, taṃ hatthena parāmasitvā sallakkhetvā nisīditabbaṃ. Mahāpaccariyaṃ pana ‘‘ghanasāṭakenāpi atthate yasmiṃ vali na paññāyati, taṃ nappaṭivekkhitabbanti vuttaṃ.
在木杵的案例中,“非故意”是指没有杀心、行为失误的情况。所以他说:“我是非故意的。”臼的案例意思很明白。在老年出家的几个案例中,第一个案例里,他说“不要障碍比丘僧团”而把他赶走了。第二个案例里,在僧团中或众人中被叫作“长老的儿子”,他因为这句话感到厌烦,说“让他死吧”而把他赶走了。第三个案例里,因为让他产生痛苦,犯了土喇咤亚罪。巴利
Musalavatthusmiṃ – asañciccoti avadhakacetano viraddhapayogo hi so. Tenāha ‘‘asañcicco aha’’nti. Udukkhalavatthu uttānameva. Vuḍḍhapabbajitavatthūsupaṭhamavatthusmiṃ ‘‘bhikkhusaṅghassa paṭibandhaṃ mā akāsī’’ti paṇāmesi. Dutiyavatthusmiṃ – saṅghamajjhepi gaṇamajjhepi ‘‘mahallakattherassa putto’’ti vuccamāno tena vacanena aṭṭīyamāno ‘‘maratu aya’’nti paṇāmesi. Tatiyavatthusmiṃ – tassa dukkhuppādanena thullaccayaṃ.
181 181. 接下来的三个案例本身意思很清楚。在掺毒钵食的案例中——那位比丘是修习六和敬法的,他先把最好的食物布施给同梵行者,然后自己才吃。因此说“他布施了首要之物”。“首要之物”就是首要的行为;意思是首先得到的钵食,或者最上等、最精妙的钵食。然而他那种被称为布施的首要行为,其实没办法真正施舍出去,因为他是从长老座开始分发钵食的。那些比丘,就是从长老座开始受用钵食的比丘;据说他们全都命终了。这里其余的内容意思很清楚。而在没有信心、怀有邪见的家庭中,恭敬地得到精妙食物后,如果不加观察,既不该自己吃,也不该给别人。即使从那里得到隔夜的食物或点心,也不该吃。因为那些家庭会把被蛇蝎等爬过、本该丢弃的东西也拿来布施。涂了香料、姜黄等物的钵食也不该接受。他们甚至认为,擦拭过身上患病处后放着的食物也可以布施。巴利
181. Tato parāni tīṇi vatthūni uttānatthāneva. Visagatapiṇḍapātavatthusmiṃ – sārāṇīyadhammapūrako so bhikkhu aggapiṇḍaṃ sabrahmacārīnaṃ datvāva bhuñjati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘aggakārikaṃ adāsī’’ti. Aggakārikanti aggakiriyaṃ; paṭhamaṃ laddhapiṇḍapātaṃ aggaggaṃ vā paṇītapaṇītaṃ piṇḍapātanti attho. Yā pana tassa dānasaṅkhātā aggakiriyā, sā na sakkā dātuṃ, piṇḍapātañhi so therāsanato paṭṭhāya adāsi. Te bhikkhūti te therāsanato paṭṭhāya paribhuttapiṇḍapātā bhikkhū; te kira sabbepi kālamakaṃsu. Sesamettha uttānameva. Assaddhesu pana micchādiṭṭhikesu kulesu sakkaccaṃ paṇītabhojanaṃ labhitvā anupaparikkhitvā neva attanā paribhuñjitabbaṃ, na paresaṃ dātabbaṃ. Yampi ābhidosikaṃ bhattaṃ vā khajjakaṃ vā tato labhati, tampi na paribhuñjitabbaṃ. Apihitavatthumpi hi sappavicchikādīhi adhisayitaṃ chaḍḍanīyadhammaṃ tāni kulāni denti. Gandhahaliddādimakkhitopi tato piṇḍapāto na gahetabbo. Sarīre rogaṭṭhānāni puñchitvā ṭhapitabhattampi hi tāni dātabbaṃ maññantīti.
在检验的案例中,检验的人用两种方式检验:他检验毒药,心想“它能不能杀死这个人?”;或者检验人,心想“这个人吃了这毒药会不会死?”这两种情况下,如果都是出于检验的意图而给的,那么不管对方死了还是没死,都犯土喇咤亚。但如果是以“让这毒药杀死他”或“让这个人吃下这毒药后死掉”这样的意图给的,那么对方死了就犯巴拉基格;没死就犯土喇咤亚。巴利
Vīmaṃsanavatthusmiṃ – vīmaṃsamāno dve vīmaṃsati – ‘‘sakkoti nu kho imaṃ māretuṃ no’’ti visaṃ vā vīmaṃsati, ‘‘mareyya nu kho ayaṃ imaṃ visaṃ khāditvā no’’ti puggalaṃ vā. Ubhayathāpi vīmaṃsādhippāyena dinne maratu vā mā vā thullaccayaṃ. ‘‘Idaṃ visaṃ etaṃ māretū’’ti vā ‘‘idaṃ visaṃ khāditvā ayaṃ maratū’’ti vā evaṃ dinne pana sace marati, pārājikaṃ; no ce, thullaccayaṃ.
182-3 从这以下,三个石头案例和三个砖头-凿子-椽子案例,意思都很清楚。而且,犯与不犯的区分不只是依据石头等物来判定,依据棍棒、锤子、利器、织机等物也同样可以判定。因此,律典中虽然没有提到,也应当依照已经说过的道理来理解。巴利
182-3. Ito parāni tīṇi silāvatthūni tīṇi iṭṭhakavāsigopānasīvatthūni ca uttānatthāneva. Na kevalañca silādīnaṃyeva vasena ayaṃ āpattānāpattibhedo hoti, daṇḍamuggaranikhādanavemādīnampi vasena hotiyeva, tasmā pāḷiyaṃ anāgatampi āgatanayeneva veditabbaṃ.
关于架子的案例——“架子”是指高架床,是为了做涂白、花环、藤蔓等装饰工作而搭的。在这里,“贤友,绑在不稳的地方”是指以杀心指定一个位置,从那里掉下去会被树桩刺穿,或者掉进坑穴、悬崖等地方而死。这里,有人指定上面的位置,心想“从这里掉下去会死”;有人指定下面的位置,心想“掉到这里会死”;有人两处都指定,心想“从这里掉到这里会死”。其中,如果那人没有从上面指定的地方掉下去,而是从别处掉下去;或者没有掉到下面指定的地方,而是掉到别处;或者在两处都指定的情况下,错过了其中任何一处而掉下去——那人死了的话,因为杀心不成立,所以无犯。覆盖精舍的案例也是同样的道理。巴利
Aṭṭakavatthūsu – aṭṭakoti vehāsamañco vuccati; yaṃ setakammamālākammalatākammādīnaṃ atthāya bandhanti. Tattha āvuso atraṭṭhito bandhāhīti maraṇādhippāyo yatra ṭhito patitvā khāṇunā vā bhijjeyya, sobbhapapātādīsu vā mareyya , tādisaṃ ṭhānaṃ sandhāyāha. Ettha ca koci upariṭhānaṃ niyāmeti ‘‘ito patitvā marissatī’’ti, koci heṭṭhā ṭhānaṃ ‘‘idha patitvā marissatī’’ti, koci ubhayampi ‘‘ito idha patitvā marissatī’’ti. Tatra yo upari niyamitaṭṭhānā apatitvā aññato patati, heṭṭhā niyamitaṭṭhāne vā apatitvā aññattha patati, ubhayaniyāme vā yaṃkiñci ekaṃ virādhetvā patati, tasmiṃ mate visaṅketattā anāpatti. Vihāracchādanavatthusmimpi eseva nayo.
关于不乐住的案例:据说那位比丘看到欲寻等念头生起,却没办法制止,于是对教法生不起欢喜,心里倾向于过在家生活。他随后想:“我宁可死,也不愿破戒。”于是他爬上那座山,跳下悬崖时,压死了一个编竹器的工匠。“编竹器的工匠”就是做竹器的人。诸比丘,不应自己跳下去——意思是说,不应让自己坠落。这里是换了一种格的变化来说的。在这里,不仅不应自己跳下去,也不该用其他任何方式自杀,甚至断食而死也不行。如果有病的人,明明有药、也有看护的人,却因为想死而断食,那也是恶作。如果有人得了重病,拖了很久,照顾他的比丘们又累又厌烦,心想“什么时候才能摆脱这个病人啊”,因此感到苦恼。如果他心想“这个身体再怎么照料也撑不住,比丘们也已经累了”,于是断食、不吃药,这是可以的。如果有人心想“这个病很凶,寿命行撑不住了,而我的殊胜证悟看起来已经近在手边”,因此断食,也是可以的。即使没有病,如果生起了悚惧心,心想“到处找食物就是障碍,我要专心修业处”,以修业处为理由而断食,也是可以的。但如果在宣称自己已得殊胜证悟之后断食,那就不可以。因为这种事只能对同类的、有惭耻心的比丘们说。巴利
Anabhirativatthusmiṃ – so kira bhikkhu kāmavitakkādīnaṃ samudācāraṃ disvā nivāretuṃ asakkonto sāsane anabhirato gihibhāvābhimukho jāto. Tato cintesi – ‘‘yāva sīlabhedaṃ na pāpuṇāmi tāva marissāmī’’ti. Atha taṃ pabbataṃ abhiruhitvā papāte papatanto aññataraṃ vilīvakāraṃ ottharitvā māresi. Vilīvakāranti veṇukāraṃ. Na ca bhikkhave attānaṃ pātetabbanti na attā pātetabbo. Vibhattibyattayena panetaṃ vuttaṃ. Ettha ca na kevalaṃ na pātetabbaṃ, aññenapi yena kenaci upakkamena antamaso āhārupacchedenapi na māretabbo. Yopi hi gilāno vijjamāne bhesajje ca upaṭṭhākesu ca maritukāmo āhāraṃ upacchindati, dukkaṭameva. Yassa pana mahāābādho cirānubaddho, bhikkhū upaṭṭhahantā kilamanti jigucchanti ‘‘kadā nu kho gilānato muccissāmā’’ti aṭṭīyanti. Sace so ‘‘ayaṃ attabhāvo paṭijaggiyamānopi na tiṭṭhati, bhikkhū ca kilamantī’’ti āhāraṃ upacchindati, bhesajjaṃ na sevati vaṭṭati. Yo pana ‘‘ayaṃ rogo kharo, āyusaṅkhārā na tiṭṭhanti, ayañca me visesādhigamo hatthappatto viya dissatī’’ti upacchindati vaṭṭatiyeva. Agilānassāpi uppannasaṃvegassa ‘‘āhārapariyesanaṃ nāma papañco, kammaṭṭhānameva anuyuñjissāmī’’ti kammaṭṭhānasīsena upacchindantassa vaṭṭati. Visesādhigamaṃ byākaritvā āhāraṃ upacchindati, na vaṭṭati. Sabhāgānañhi lajjībhikkhūnaṃ kathetuṃ vaṭṭati.
关于石头的事例:“为嬉戏”是指带着嬉笑、带着玩乐,意思就是玩耍。“石头”就是石块。不只是石块,任何木块或砖块,都不应该用手或器械投掷。如果是为了建造塔庙等目的,在劳作时嬉笑着滚动、投掷或抛掷石头等,是允许的。同样,做其他这类新工作时,或者清洗物品时,举起木头或洗衣棒投掷,也是允许的。在分发食物等时候,投掷木棍或土块赶走乌鸦或狗,也是允许的。巴利
Silāvatthusmiṃ – davāyāti davena hassena; khiḍḍāyāti attho. Silāti pāsāṇo; na kevalañca pāsāṇo, aññampi yaṃkiñci dārukhaṇḍaṃ vā iṭṭhakākhaṇḍaṃ vā hatthena vā yantena vā pavijjhituṃ na vaṭṭati. Cetiyādīnaṃ atthāya pāsāṇādayo hasantā hasantā pavaṭṭentipi khipantipi ukkhipantipi kammasamayoti vaṭṭati. Aññampi īdisaṃ navakammaṃ vā karontā bhaṇḍakaṃ vā dhovantā rukkhaṃ vā dhovanadaṇḍakaṃ vā ukkhipitvā pavijjhanti, vaṭṭati. Bhattavissaggakālādīsu kāke vā soṇe vā kaṭṭhaṃ vā kathalaṃ vā khipitvā palāpeti, vaṭṭati.
184 关于出汗等事的案例,含义都很清楚。而在这里,“我是追悔者”并不是说不用照顾病人,而是应当怀着想利益他的心,先全面观察病人的体力强弱、喜好、适宜与不适宜,然后再去照顾。巴利
184.Sedanādivatthūni sabbāneva uttānatthāni. Ettha ca ahaṃ kukkuccakoti na gilānupaṭṭhānaṃ na kātabbaṃ, hitakāmatāya sabbaṃ gilānassa balābalañca ruciñca sappāyāsappāyañca upalakkhetvā kātabbaṃ.
185 185. 关于“与情夫怀孕的妇人有关的情形”——“丈夫已外出”是指丈夫去了远方。“令胎堕落”是指被压碎后会使胎儿堕落的那种药。两个关于有夫之妇的情形,含义本身就很清楚。关于“压碎胎儿”的情形——当有人说“你压碎后让她堕胎”时,如果是由别人压碎而让她堕胎,则不算偏离约定。当有人说“你让别人压碎后让她堕胎”时,如果是她自己压碎而让她堕胎,同样算偏离约定。对于人的身体,所谓“间接方式”是不存在的。因此,当有人说“胎儿被压碎后就会堕落”时,无论是她自己压碎,还是让别人压碎后使其堕落,都不算偏离约定;一样是巴拉基格罪。在“烧灼”的情形中,道理也是如此。巴利
185. Jāragabbhinivatthusmiṃ – pavutthapatikāti pavāsaṃ gatapatikā. Gabbhapātananti yena paribhuttena gabbho patati, tādisaṃ bhesajjaṃ. Dve pajāpatikavatthūni uttānatthāneva. Gabbhamaddanavatthusmiṃ – ‘‘madditvā pātehī’’ti vutte aññena maddāpetvā pāteti, visaṅketaṃ. ‘‘Maddāpetvā pātāpehī’’ti vuttepi sayaṃ madditvā pāteti, visaṅketameva. Manussaviggahe pariyāyo nāma natthi. Tasmā ‘‘gabbho nāma maddite patatī’’ti vutte sā sayaṃ vā maddatu, aññena vā maddāpetvā pātetu, visaṅketo natthi; pārājikameva tāpanavatthusmimpi eseva nayo.
关于不孕女的情形:所谓“不孕女”,是指怀不上胎的妇女。其实并不存在绝对怀不上胎的妇女,只是有的妇女即使怀上了胎,胎儿也留不住,这里说的正是这种情况。据说在经期,所有妇女都能怀胎。而被称为“不孕”的这位,她腹中所生众生的不善异熟果报现前。那些以微少的善异熟取得结生的众生,被不善异熟所压制而死去。因为在刚结生的时候,由于业力的作用,胎儿会以两种方式留不住——要么是风,要么是虫。风把胎儿吹干,让它消失;虫则把胎儿吃掉。如果针对这风或虫配药治疗,胎儿本可以留得住;但那位比丘没有这样做,反而给了别的猛烈药物,结果她就死了。世尊因为配药之故,制定了恶作罪。巴利
Vañjhitthivatthusmiṃ – vañjhitthī nāma yā gabbhaṃ na gaṇhāti. Gabbhaṃ agaṇhanakaitthī nāma natthi, yassā pana gahitopi gabbho na saṇṭhāti, taṃyeva sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ. Utusamaye kira sabbitthiyo gabbhaṃ gaṇhanti. Yā panāyaṃ ‘‘vañjhā’’ti vuccati, tassā kucchiyaṃ nibbattasattānaṃ akusalavipāko sampāpuṇāti. Te parittakusalavipākena gahitapaṭisandhikā akusalavipākena adhibhūtā vinassanti. Abhinavapaṭisandhiyaṃyeva hi kammānubhāvena dvīhākārehi gabbho na saṇṭhāti – vātena vā pāṇakehi vā. Vāto sosetvā antaradhāpeti, pāṇakā khāditvā. Tassa pana vātassa pāṇakānaṃ vā paṭighātāya bhesajje kate gabbho saṇṭhaheyya; so bhikkhu taṃ akatvā aññaṃ kharabhesajjaṃ adāsi. Tena sā kālamakāsi. Bhagavā bhesajjassa kaṭattā dukkaṭaṃ paññāpesi.
第二个事例也是同样的道理。因此,对来来去去的外来人不应该配药;如果配了,就犯恶作罪。但对五种同法者则应该配药,也就是对比丘、比丘尼、正学女、沙弥、沙弥尼。因为这些人戒行相等、信心相等、智慧相等,都在三学上用功,不能不给他们配药。配药时,如果他们有物品,就取他们的物品调配好再给;如果没有,就用自己的物品来配。如果自己也没有,就通过乞食的行仪,或者从亲属邀请的地方去寻求。如果实在得不到,为了病人的缘故,即使没有事先请求,也应该拿来配药。巴利
Dutiyavatthusmimpi eseva nayo. Tasmā āgatāgatassa parajanassa bhesajjaṃ na kātabbaṃ, karonto dukkaṭaṃ āpajjati. Pañcannaṃ pana sahadhammikānaṃ kātabbaṃ bhikkhussa bhikkhuniyā sikkhamānāya sāmaṇerassa sāmaṇeriyāti. Samasīlasaddhāpaññānañhi etesaṃ tīsu sikkhāsu yuttānaṃ bhesajjaṃ akātuṃ na labbhati, karontena ca sace tesaṃ atthi, tesaṃ santakaṃ gahetvā yojetvā dātabbaṃ. Sace natthi, attano santakaṃ kātabbaṃ. Sace attanopi natthi, bhikkhācāravattena vā ñātakapavāritaṭṭhānato vā pariyesitabbaṃ. Alabhantena gilānassa atthāya akataviññattiyāpi āharitvā kātabbaṃ.
还有另外五种人,也可以为他们配药:母亲、父亲、照顾他们的人、为自己做事的人,以及“黄叶者”。所谓“黄叶者”,是指想出家、正在准备衣钵期间住在寺院里的人。在这五种人当中,如果父母有权势,而且并不指望(得到药物),那就可以不给他们配;但如果他们即使身居王位也仍然指望得到,那就不能不配。对于指望得到药物的人,应当给药物;对于不知道怎么调配的人,应当调配好了再给。为了一切人的利益去寻求药物时,应当依照前面讲同法者时所说的办法去做。如果把母亲接到寺院里来照顾,那么所有服侍都应当以不直接触碰的方式来做;嚼食和啖食应当亲手递给她。父亲则应当像对待沙弥一样,亲手为他沐浴、按摩等来侍奉。那些照顾、看护父母的人,也应当同样对待。所谓“做事的人”,是指拿了工钱,在林中砍柴,或者做其他活计的人。他生病时,在他的亲属还没来看他之前,应当为他配药。如果有人完全依止比丘,做一切事务,那就必须为他配药。对于黄叶者,也应当像对待沙弥一样来对待。巴利
Aparesampi pañcannaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭati – mātu, pitu, tadupaṭṭhākānaṃ, attano veyyāvaccakarassa, paṇḍupalāsassāti. Paṇḍupalāso nāma yo pabbajjāpekkho yāva pattacīvaraṃ paṭiyādiyati tāva vihāre vasati. Tesu sace mātāpitaro issarā honti, na paccāsīsanti, akātuṃ vaṭṭati. Sace pana rajjepi ṭhitā paccāsīsanti, akātuṃ na vaṭṭati. Bhesajjaṃ paccāsīsantānaṃ bhesajjaṃ dātabbaṃ, yojetuṃ ajānantānaṃ yojetvā dātabbaṃ. Sabbesaṃ atthāya sahadhammikesu vuttanayeneva pariyesitabbaṃ. Sace pana mātaraṃ vihāre ānetvā jaggati, sabbaṃ parikammaṃ anāmasantena kātabbaṃ. Khādanīyaṃ bhojanīyaṃ sahatthā dātabbaṃ. Pitā pana yathā sāmaṇero evaṃ sahatthena nhāpanasambāhanādīni katvā upaṭṭhātabbo. Ye ca mātāpitaro upaṭṭhahanti paṭijagganti, tesampi evameva kātabbaṃ. Veyyāvaccakaro nāma yo vetanaṃ gahetvā araññe dārūni vā chindati, aññaṃ vā kiñci kammaṃ karoti, tassa roge uppanne yāva ñātakā na passanti tāva bhesajjaṃ kātabbaṃ. Yo pana bhikkhunissitakova hutvā sabbakammāni karoti, tassa bhesajjaṃ kātabbameva. Paṇḍupalāsepi sāmaṇere viya paṭipajjitabbaṃ.
还有另外十种人,也可以为他们配药:哥哥、弟弟、姐姐、妹妹、小姨母、大姨母、叔父、伯父、姑母、舅父。给所有这些亲属配药时,应当取用他们自己的药,只是调配好再给。如果他们自己的药不够,而且他们请求说“尊者,请先给我们,我们会还给您的”,那就可以暂时给。即使他们不请求,也可以说“我们有药,请先拿去用”,或者心里想“等他们有了就会还”,然后给。如果他们归还,就收下;如果不还,也不应去催。除了这十种亲属以外,不可为其他人配药。巴利
Aparesampi dasannaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭati – jeṭṭhabhātu, kaniṭṭhabhātu, jeṭṭhabhaginiyā, kaniṭṭhabhaginiyā, cūḷamātuyā, mahāmātuyā, cūḷapituno, mahāpituno, pitucchāya, mātulassāti. Tesaṃ pana sabbesampi karontena tesaṃyeva santakaṃ bhesajjaṃ gahetvā kevalaṃ yojetvā dātabbaṃ. Sace pana nappahonti, yācanti ca ‘‘detha no, bhante, tumhākaṃ paṭidassāmā’’ti tāvakālikaṃ dātabbaṃ. Sacepi na yācanti, ‘‘amhākaṃ bhesajjaṃ atthi, tāvakālikaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti vatvā vā ‘‘yadā nesaṃ bhavissati tadā dassantī’’ti ābhogaṃ vā katvā dātabbaṃ. Sace paṭidenti, gahetabbaṃ, no ce denti, na codetabbā. Ete dasa ñātake ṭhapetvā aññesaṃ na kātabbaṃ.
对于这些人的子孙后代,一直到第七代的家族范围之内,让他们拿来四种资具,或者没有受请就为他们配药,或者做医生的活,都不犯污家罪。如果嫂子或妹夫生病,是亲戚的话,也可以为他们做。不是亲戚的话,就当作兄弟和姐妹的那一份来给,说“请交给你们照顾的人”。或者当作他们子女的那一份来给,说“请带给你们的父母”。用这个方法,在一切情况下都应该这样判定。巴利
Etesaṃ puttaparamparāya pana yāva sattamo kulaparivaṭṭo tāva cattāro paccaye āharāpentassa akataviññatti vā bhesajjaṃ karontassa vejjakammaṃ vā kuladūsakāpatti vā na hoti. Sace bhātujāyā bhaginisāmiko vā gilānā honti, ñātakā ce, tesampi vaṭṭati. Aññātakā ce, bhātu ca bhaginiyā ca katvā dātabbaṃ, ‘‘tumhākaṃ jagganaṭṭhāne dethā’’ti. Atha vā tesaṃ puttānaṃ katvā dātabbaṃ, ‘‘tumhākaṃ mātāpitūnaṃ dethā’’ti. Etenupāyena sabbapadesupi vinicchayo veditabbo.
为了他们,应让亲属沙弥或其他沙弥从林中取药送来。若是为自己,取来之后也应该给他们。他们自己也应该尽“为戒师采药”的职责去采。戒师的父母生病来到精舍,而戒师又去了别的地方,共住弟子就应该把属于戒师的药给他。如果没有,就应该舍弃自己的药,把它归给戒师后(给其父母)。如果自己也没有,就按前面说的方式去找来,做成属于戒师的(药)再给。戒师对共住弟子的父母也应该同样对待。这个原则也适用于老师和弟子之间。另外,如果有客人、盗贼、战败的领主、被亲属抛弃的穷人、乡下人,生病后进入精舍,对所有这些人都应该毫无期待地给他们做药。巴利
Tesaṃ atthāya ca sāmaṇerehi araññato bhesajjaṃ āharāpentena ñātisāmaṇerehi vā āharāpetabbaṃ. Attano atthāya vā āharāpetvā dātabbaṃ. Tehipi ‘‘upajjhāyassa āharāmā’’ti vattasīsena āharitabbaṃ. Upajjhāyassa mātāpitaro gilānā vihāraṃ āgacchanti, upajjhāyo ca disāpakkanto hoti, saddhivihārikena upajjhāyassa santakaṃ bhesajjaṃ dātabbaṃ. No ce atthi, attano bhesajjaṃ upajjhāyassa pariccajitvā dātabbaṃ. Attanopi asante vuttanayena pariyesitvā upajjhāyassa santakaṃ katvā dātabbaṃ. Upajjhāyenapi saddhivihārikassa mātāpitūsu evameva paṭipajjitabbaṃ. Esa nayo ācariyantevāsikesupi. Aññopi yo āgantuko vā coro vā yuddhaparājito issaro vā ñātakehi pariccatto kapaṇo vā gamiyamanusso vā gilāno hutvā vihāraṃ pavisati, sabbesaṃ apaccāsīsantena bhesajjaṃ kātabbaṃ.
有信心的家族会用四种资具护持比丘僧团,像父母一样对待他们。如果那里有人生病了,他们出于信任说:“尊者,请配好药给我们吧。”这时既不该给,也不该配。但如果他们懂得如法的方式后这样问:“尊者,对于某某病,他们是用什么药配制的?”就可以回答说:“他们拿这些和那些药材来配制。”可要是他们问:“尊者,我母亲病了,请先告诉我药方。”那就不该告诉。不过,比丘之间可以互相交谈:“贤友,对于某某比丘的这种病,他们用了什么药?”
“尊者,用了这些和那些药材。”另一个人听了之后,为自己母亲配药,这是允许的。巴利
Saddhaṃ kulaṃ hoti catūhi paccayehi upaṭṭhāyakaṃ bhikkhusaṅghassa mātāpituṭṭhāniyaṃ, tatra ce koci gilāno hoti, tassatthāya vissāsena ‘‘bhesajjaṃ katvā bhante dethā’’ti vadanti, neva dātabbaṃ na kātabbaṃ. Atha pana kappiyaṃ ñatvā evaṃ pucchanti – ‘‘bhante, asukassa nāma rogassa kiṃ bhesajjaṃ karontī’’ti? ‘‘Idañcidañca gahetvā karontī’’ti vattuṃ vaṭṭati. ‘‘Bhante, mayhaṃ mātā gilānā, bhesajjaṃ tāva ācikkhathā’’ti evaṃ pucchite pana na ācikkhitabbaṃ. Aññamaññaṃ pana kathā kātabbā – ‘‘āvuso, asukassa nāma bhikkhuno imasmiṃ roge kiṃ bhesajjaṃ kariṃsū’’ti? ‘‘Idañcidañca bhante’’ti. Taṃ sutvā itaro mātu bhesajjaṃ karoti, vaṭṭateva.
听说玛哈巴杜玛长老的事是这样的:瓦萨跋国王的王后生了病,有个女人来问长老,长老没有说“我不知道”,而是同样跟比丘们商量了一番。比丘们听了之后,就为她配了药。病好了以后,她把装满药的药箱,连同三衣和三百个迦诃波那,一起带来放在长老脚前,说:“尊者,请做花供养吧。”长老说:“这叫做师长应得的那一份。”就以如法的方式让人收下,然后做了花供养。对药物的处理,就应当这样去做。巴利
Mahāpadumattheropi kira vasabharañño deviyā roge uppanne ekāya itthiyā āgantvā pucchito ‘‘na jānāmī’’ti avatvā evameva bhikkhūhi saddhiṃ samullapesi. Taṃ sutvā tassā bhesajjamakaṃsu. Vūpasante ca roge ticīvarena tīhi ca kahāpaṇasatehi saddhiṃ bhesajjacaṅkoṭakaṃ pūretvā āharitvā therassa pādamūle ṭhapetvā ‘‘bhante, pupphapūjaṃ karothā’’ti āhaṃsu. Thero ‘‘ācariyabhāgo nāmāya’’nti kappiyavasena gāhāpetvā pupphapūjaṃ akāsi. Evaṃ tāva bhesajje paṭipajjitabbaṃ.
有人请求说“尊者,请为病人诵护卫经”时,不应该诵;但如果对方说“请诵”,就可以诵。如果比丘心想“人们不懂,要是不诵,他们会后悔”,那就可以诵。如果有人说“请把护卫水和护卫线做好后给我”,那就应该只为他们搅动水、用手擦拭线,然后交给他们。如果比丘把寺院的水或自己的线送给他们,就犯恶作。人们拿来水和线,坐下后说“请诵护卫经”,就可以诵。如果他们不懂,应该告诉他们。比丘们坐着时,人们把水倒在比丘脚上,放好线后就走开,说“请作护卫,请诵护卫经”,这时不应该把脚移开。因为人们会因此后悔。如果村里有人为了病人派人到寺院,说“请诵护卫经”,就应该诵。如果村里王宫等处发生疾病或灾难,被请去诵,就应该诵《阿塔那帝亚经》等经。如果被请“请来为病人授戒、说法”,或者“请来王宫或大臣家中授戒、说法”,也应该去授戒、说法。如果被请“请来为亡者围绕”,不应该去。但若以修行为由,心想“我去看尸陀林、看不净,可以获得死随念”,那就可以去。对护卫经,应该这样奉行。巴利
Paritte pana ‘‘gilānassa parittaṃ karotha, bhante’’ti vutte na kātabbaṃ, ‘‘bhaṇathā’’ti vutte pana kātabbaṃ. Sace pissa evaṃ hoti ‘‘manussā nāma na jānanti, akayiramāne vippaṭisārino bhavissantī’’ti kātabbaṃ; ‘‘parittodakaṃ parittasuttaṃ katvā dethā’’ti vuttena pana tesaṃyeva udakaṃ hatthena cāletvā suttaṃ parimajjetvā dātabbaṃ. Sace vihārato udakaṃ attano santakaṃ vā suttaṃ deti, dukkaṭaṃ. Manussā udakañca suttañca gahetvā nisīditvā ‘‘parittaṃ bhaṇathā’’ti vadanti, kātabbaṃ. No ce jānanti, ācikkhitabbaṃ. Bhikkhūnaṃ nisinnānaṃ pādesu udakaṃ ākiritvā suttañca ṭhapetvā gacchanti ‘‘parittaṃ karotha, parittaṃ bhaṇathā’’ti na pādā apanetabbā. Manussā hi vippaṭisārino honti. Antogāme gilānassatthāya vihāraṃ pesenti, ‘‘parittaṃ bhaṇantū’’ti bhaṇitabbaṃ. Antogāme rājagehādīsu roge vā upaddave vā uppanne pakkosāpetvā bhaṇāpenti, āṭānāṭiyasuttādīni bhaṇitabbāni. ‘‘Āgantvā gilānassa sikkhāpadāni dentu, dhammaṃ kathentu. Rājantepure vā amaccagehe vā āgantvā sikkhāpadāni dentu, dhammaṃ kathentū’’ti pesitepi gantvā sikkhāpadāni dātabbāni, dhammo kathetabbo. ‘‘Matānaṃ parivāratthaṃ āgacchantū’’ti pakkosanti, na gantabbaṃ. Sīvathikadassane asubhadassane ca maraṇassatiṃ paṭilabhissāmīti kammaṭṭhānasīsena gantuṃ vaṭṭati. Evaṃ paritte paṭipajjitabbaṃ.
关于团食:没有触碰过的团食,该给谁、不该给谁?首先应该给父母。即使它值一个钱币,也不会败坏信施。也该给照顾父母的人、为父母做事的人,以及“黄叶者”。其中,对黄叶者,即使放进钵里给他也可以。除了这些人以外,对其他在家人,即使是父母,也不可以给。因为出家人所受用的东西,对在家人来说,就像塔物一样。另外,所谓没有触碰过的团食,即使对来到跟前的强盗或权贵,也应该给。为什么?因为不给的话,他们会碰触食物说“他们不给”;给的话,他们又会生气说“他们给的是剩饭”。他们一旦发怒,甚至会杀人性命,也会给教法制造障碍。这里还应讲一个故事:有个盗龙想求王位而四处游走。对团食应当这样处理。巴利
Piṇḍapāte pana – anāmaṭṭhapiṇḍapāto kassa dātabbo, kassa na dātabbo? Mātāpitunaṃ tāva dātabbo. Sacepi kahāpaṇagghanako hoti, saddhādeyyavinipātanaṃ natthi. Mātāpituupaṭṭhākānaṃ veyyāvaccakarassa paṇḍupalāsassāti etesampi dātabbo. Tattha paṇḍupalāsassa thālake pakkhipitvāpi dātuṃ vaṭṭati. Taṃ ṭhapetvā aññesaṃ āgārikānaṃ mātāpitunampi na vaṭṭati. Pabbajitaparibhogo hi āgārikānaṃ cetiyaṭṭhāniyo. Apica anāmaṭṭhapiṇḍapāto nāmesa sampattassa dāmarikacorassāpi issarassāpi dātabbo. Kasmā? Te hi adīyamānepi ‘‘na dentī’’ti āmasitvā dīyamānepi ‘‘ucchiṭṭhakaṃ dentī’’ti kujjhanti. Kuddhā jīvitāpi voropenti, sāsanassāpi antarāyaṃ karonti. Rajjaṃ patthayamānassa vicarato coranāgassa vatthu cettha kathetabbaṃ. Evaṃ piṇḍapāte paṭipajjitabbaṃ.
那么,接待应该对谁做,不应该对谁做?所谓接待,就是无论对来到精舍的任何人——不管是新来的客人、穷人、盗贼还是有权势的人——都应该做。怎么做呢?比如,看到一位花光了路费的新来者到了精舍,就应该给他水喝,给他涂脚用的油。如果他是合适的时间来的,就给他粥和饭;如果是在不合适的时间来的,要是有米,就给他米。他来得不是时候,也不该说“你走吧”。应该给他住的地方。做这一切都不应该期待回报。不应该生起这样的念头:“人们是四种资具的施主,这样善待他们,他们就会一次次生起信心,然后来帮忙。”对盗贼,即使是属于僧团的东西,也应该给。巴利
Paṭisanthāro pana kassa kātabbo, kassa na kātabbo? Paṭisanthāro nāma vihāraṃ sampattassa yassa kassaci āgantukassa vā daliddassa vā corassa vā issarassa vā kātabboyeva. Kathaṃ? Āgantukaṃ tāva khīṇaparibbayaṃ vihāraṃ sampattaṃ disvā pānīyaṃ dātabbaṃ, pādamakkhanatelaṃ dātabbaṃ. Kāle āgatassa yāgubhattaṃ, vikāle āgatassa sace taṇḍulā atthi; taṇḍulā dātabbā. Avelāyaṃ sampatto ‘‘gacchāhī’’ti na vattabbo. Sayanaṭṭhānaṃ dātabbaṃ. Sabbaṃ apaccāsīsanteneva kātabbaṃ. ‘‘Manussā nāma catupaccayadāyakā evaṃ saṅgahe kayiramāne punappunaṃ pasīditvā upakāraṃ karissantī’’ti cittaṃ na uppādetabbaṃ. Corānaṃ pana saṅghikampi dātabbaṃ.
为了说明接待的功德利益,像贼王奈迦的故事、和兄弟一起前往赡部洲的摩诃奈迦王的例子、父王在位时四位大臣的事例、无畏盗贼的故事等,许多这样的例子在《大义注》中都有详细讲述。巴利
Paṭisanthārānisaṃsadīpanatthañca coranāgavatthu, bhātarā saddhiṃ jambudīpagatassa mahānāgarañño vatthu, piturājassa rajje catunnaṃ amaccānaṃ vatthu, abhayacoravatthūti evamādīni bahūni vatthūni mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ vitthārato vuttāni.
这里讲一个故事来说明。据说在锡兰岛,有个叫无畏的盗贼,带着五百个手下,在一个地方扎了营,把周围三由旬的地方都清空了,住在那里。阿努拉德普勒的居民不敢渡过卡丹巴河,通往支提山的路上行人都断绝了。有一天,那个盗贼说:“我要去抢劫支提山。”就出发了。寺里的工人看见了,就去报告迪卡跋纳咖·阿跋亚长老。长老问:“有酥油、糖蜜之类的东西吗?”回答说:“有的,尊者。”
“那就给盗贼们吧。有米吗?”
“有的,尊者,有给僧团带来的米、叶菜和牛乳。”
“那就做好饭给盗贼们吧。”寺里的工人就照办了。盗贼们吃完饭,问:“这招待是谁做的?”回答说:“是我们的师父无畏长老做的。”盗贼们就来到长老面前,顶礼之后说:“我们本来是来抢僧团和支提山财物的,但被您这样的招待感动了,生起了信心。从今天起,寺院的如法守护就交给我们负责,请市民们来布施,来礼敬支提山吧。”从那时起,市民们来布施的时候,盗贼们就在河边迎接,一路护送到寺院,在寺院里布施的时候也站在旁边守护。市民们还把比丘们吃剩的食物给盗贼们吃。离开的时候,那些盗贼也把他们送到河边才回去。巴利
Tatrāyaṃ ekavatthudīpanā – sīhaḷadīpe kira abhayo nāma coro pañcasataparivāro ekasmiṃ ṭhāne khandhāvāraṃ bandhitvā samantā tiyojanaṃ ubbāsetvā vasati. Anurādhapuravāsino kadambanadiṃ na uttaranti, cetiyagirimagge janasañcāro upacchinno. Athekadivasaṃ coro ‘‘cetiyagiriṃ vilumpissāmī’’ti agamāsi. Ārāmikā disvā dīghabhāṇakaabhayattherassa ārocesuṃ. Thero ‘‘sappiphāṇitādīni atthī’’ti pucchi. ‘‘Atthi, bhante’’ti. ‘‘Corānaṃ detha, taṇḍulā atthī’’ti? ‘‘Atthi, bhante, saṅghassatthāya āhaṭā taṇḍulā ca pattasākañca goraso cā’’ti. ‘‘Bhattaṃ sampādetvā corānaṃ dethā’’ti. Ārāmikā tathā kariṃsu. Corā bhattaṃ bhuñjitvā ‘‘kenāyaṃ paṭisanthāro kato’’ti pucchiṃsu. ‘‘Amhākaṃ ayyena abhayattherenā’’ti. Corā therassa santikaṃ gantvā vanditvā āhaṃsu – ‘‘mayaṃ saṅghassa ca cetiyassa ca santakaṃ acchinditvā gahessāmāti āgatā, tumhākaṃ pana iminā paṭisanthārenamha pasannā, ajja paṭṭhāya vihāre dhammikā rakkhā amhākaṃ āyattā hotu, nāgarā āgantvā dānaṃ dentu, cetiyaṃ vandantū’’ti. Tato paṭṭhāya ca nāgare dānaṃ dātuṃ āgacchante nadītīreyeva paccuggantvā rakkhantā vihāraṃ nenti, vihārepi dānaṃ dentānaṃ rakkhaṃ katvā tiṭṭhanti. Tepi bhikkhūnaṃ bhuttāvasesaṃ corānaṃ denti. Gamanakālepi te corā nadītīraṃ pāpetvā nivattanti.
有一天,比丘僧团里生起了讥嫌的议论:“这位长老仗着自己的权势,把僧团的东西给了盗贼。”长老便让人召集集会,说道:“盗贼们本来是来抢夺僧团日常用品和塔寺财物的。当时我为了让他们不拿走,就对他们做了这样的招待。你们把所有这些合在一起估个价吧,把因为这件事而没被抢走的物品也合在一起估个价。”结果,长老拿出来的全部东西加起来,还抵不上塔寺里一张上好的彩绘布毯。于是他们说:“长老做的招待做得好,既没法指责,也没法追究,既不是侵占,也不是偷盗。”有智慧的比丘应当明白招待有这样大的利益,然后去做招待。巴利
Athekadivasaṃ bhikkhusaṅghe khīyanakakathā uppannā ‘‘thero issaravatāya saṅghassa santakaṃ corānaṃ adāsī’’ti. Thero sannipātaṃ kārāpetvā āha – ‘‘corā saṅghassa pakativaṭṭañca cetiyasantakañca acchinditvā gaṇhissāmā’’ti āgamiṃsu. Atha nesaṃ mayā evaṃ na harissantīti ettako nāma paṭisanthāro kato, taṃ sabbampi ekato sampiṇḍetvā agghāpetha. Tena kāraṇena aviluttaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ ekato sampiṇḍetvā agghāpethāti. Tato sabbampi therena dinnakaṃ cetiyaghare ekaṃ varapotthakacittattharaṇaṃ na agghati. Tato āhaṃsu – ‘‘therena katapaṭisanthāro sukato codetuṃ vā sāretuṃ vā na labbhā, gīvā vā avahāro vā natthī’’ti. Evaṃ mahānisaṃso paṭisanthāroti sallakkhetvā kattabbo paṇḍitena bhikkhunāti.
187 187. 在指弹水这件事中——“uttanto”的意思是疲惫。“anassāsako”的意思是没有喘息。不过在这件事里,应当犯的是什么罪,已经在“小罪”部分说明了,所以这里没有说。巴利
187. Aṅgulipatodakavatthusmiṃ – uttantoti kilamanto. Anassāsakoti nirassāso. Imasmiṃ pana vatthusmiṃ yāya āpattiyā bhavitabbaṃ sā ‘‘khuddakesu nidiṭṭhā’’ti idha na vuttā.
紧接着的这件事里,“ottharitvā”是踩上去的意思。据说他被那些人拉扯时倒了下去。有一个人爬上他的肚子坐了下来。其余十五个人把他按在地上,像用大石头压死野兽一样把他弄死了。不过,因为那些人的目的是折磨他,不是想杀他,所以没有说这是巴拉基格罪。巴利
Tadanantare vatthusmiṃ – ottharitvāti akkamitvā. So kira tehi ākaḍḍhiyamāno patito. Eko tassa udaraṃ abhiruhitvā nisīdi. Sesāpi pannarasa janā pathaviyaṃ ajjhottharitvā adūhalapāsāṇā viya migaṃ māresuṃ. Yasmā pana te kammādhippāyā, na maraṇādhippāyā; tasmā pārājikaṃ na vuttaṃ.
在“鬼医事件”这一段里——“杀了夜叉”:那些念鬼咒的人想解救被夜叉附身的人,就召请夜叉,说“放开!”如果夜叉不放,他们就用面粉或泥土做成一个人形,砍断它的手脚等部位。那个形象上哪个部位被砍断,夜叉身上相应的部位就被砍断。如果头被砍断,夜叉也会死。这样,他们也就杀了夜叉,所以说是土喇咤亚罪。而且不只是夜叉,即使有人杀了帝释天王,也同样犯土喇咤亚罪。巴利
Bhūtavejjakavatthusmiṃ – yakkhaṃ māresīti bhūtavijjākapāṭhakā yakkhagahitaṃ mocetukāmā yakkhaṃ āvāhetvā muñcāti vadanti. No ce muñcati, piṭṭhena vā mattikāya vā rūpaṃ katvā hatthapādādīni chindanti, yaṃ yaṃ tassa chijjati taṃ taṃ yakkhassa chinnameva hoti. Sīse chinne yakkhopi marati . Evaṃ sopi māresi; tasmā thullaccayaṃ vuttaṃ. Na kevalañca yakkhameva, yopi hi sakkaṃ devarājaṃ māreyya, sopi thullaccayameva āpajjati.
在“凶暴夜叉住处”这件事里,“凶暴夜叉住处”就是指有凶恶暴虐的夜叉住在那里的精舍。如果有人不知道那是这样的精舍,只是为了住宿而派比丘去,那就无犯。如果有人是带着杀意派他去,那么对方死了就犯巴拉基格,没死就犯土喇咤亚。就像凶暴夜叉住处一样,凡是那里住着凶暴的狮子、老虎等野兽,或者蟒蛇、黑蛇等长身动物,派比丘去那种凶险住处,也应当知道有罪和无犯的区分。这是脱离巴利原文的推理方法。就像派比丘去凶暴夜叉住处一样,把凶暴夜叉派到比丘跟前,也应当知道有罪和无犯的区分。同样的道理也适用于凶暴旷野等事。这里只是词义上的差别:某个旷野里有凶暴野兽或长身动物,那就是凶暴旷野;有盗贼的,那就是盗贼旷野。而“人体巴拉基格”这一条本身很微细,不能靠间接说法来脱罪。所以,如果有人这样说:“在某个地方有盗贼坐在那里,谁能砍下他的头带来,国王就会给他特别的赏赐。”有人听了这话,就去杀了那人,这个人就是巴拉基格。巴利
Vāḷayakkhavatthusmiṃ – vāḷayakkhavihāranti yasmiṃ vihāre vāḷo caṇḍo yakkho vasati, taṃ vihāraṃ. Yo hi evarūpaṃ vihāraṃ ajānanto kevalaṃ vasanatthāya peseti, anāpatti. Yo maraṇādhippāyo peseti, so itarassa maraṇena pārājikaṃ, amaraṇena thullaccayaṃ āpajjati. Yathā ca vāḷayakkhavihāraṃ; evaṃ yattha vāḷasīhabyagghādimigā vā ajagarakaṇhasappādayo dīghajātikā vā vasanti, taṃ vāḷavihāraṃ pesentassāpi āpattānāpattibhedo veditabbo. Ayaṃ pāḷimuttakanayo. Yathā ca bhikkhuṃ vāḷayakkhavihāraṃ pesentassa; evaṃ vāḷayakkhampi bhikkhusantikaṃ pesentassa āpattānāpattibhedo veditabbo. Eseva nayo vāḷakantārādivatthūsupi. Kevalañhettha yasmiṃ kantāre vāḷamigā vā dīghajātikā vā atthi, so vāḷakantāro. Yasmiṃ corā atthi, so corakantāroti evaṃ padatthamattameva nānaṃ. Manussaviggahapārājikañca nāmetaṃ saṇhaṃ, pariyāyakathāya na muccati; tasmā yo vadeyya ‘‘asukasmiṃ nāma okāse coro nisinno , yo tassa sīsaṃ chinditvā āharati, so rājato sakkāravisesaṃ labhatī’’ti. Tassa cetaṃ vacanaṃ sutvā koci naṃ gantvā māreti, ayaṃ pārājiko hotīti.
188 “以为是那个人”等句里说的是这样:那位比丘想杀掉跟自己有仇的比丘,心里盘算:“白天杀他,我恐怕不容易平安脱身,还是夜里动手吧。”这样打定主意后,到了夜里,他来到众人睡觉的地方,以为那就是仇人,结果杀死的正是仇人本人。另一个比丘以为是仇人,却杀错了别人;还有一个比丘以为杀的是仇人的同伴,结果杀的却是仇人本人;又有一个比丘以为是仇人的同伴,结果杀的正是那个同伴本人。这些全都犯巴拉基格。巴利
188.Taṃ maññamānoti ādīsu so kira bhikkhu attano veribhikkhuṃ māretukāmo cintesi – ‘‘imaṃ me divā mārentassa na sukaraṃ bhaveyya sotthinā gantuṃ, rattiṃ naṃ māressāmī’’ti sallakkhetvā rattiṃ āgamma bahūnaṃ sayitaṭṭhāne taṃ maññamāno tameva jīvitā voropesi. Aparo taṃ maññamāno aññaṃ, aparo aññaṃ tasseva sahāyaṃ maññamāno taṃ, aparo aññaṃ tasseva sahāyaṃ maññamāno aññaṃ tassa sahāyameva jīvitā voropesi. Sabbesampi pārājikameva.
在非人附身的案例中,第一个案例里,有人心想“我要把夜叉赶走”,就动手打被附身的人;被附身的那个人心想“现在这人不可能打偏,我要打死他”。在这里,对于没有杀人意图的情况,说是无犯。但不能仅仅因为这样就该去打被非人附身的人,而应该把棕榈叶或护卫经带绑在他手上或脚上,诵念《宝经》等护卫经,并且应当说法:“不要骚扰持戒的比丘。”关于天界论等部分,含义浅显易懂。这里该说的,前面已经说过了。巴利
Amanussagahitavatthūsu paṭhame vatthusmiṃ ‘‘yakkhaṃ palāpessāmī’’ti pahāraṃ adāsi, itaro ‘‘na dānāyaṃ virajjhituṃ samattho, māressāmi na’’nti . Ettha ca namaraṇādhippāyassa anāpatti vuttāti. Na ettakeneva amanussagahitassa pahāro dātabbo, tālapaṇṇaṃ pana parittasuttaṃ vā hatthe vā pāde vā bandhitabbaṃ, ratanasuttādīni parittāni bhaṇitabbāni, ‘‘mā sīlavantaṃ bhikkhuṃ viheṭhehī’’ti dhammakathā kātabbāti. Saggakathādīni uttānatthāni. Yañhettha vattabbaṃ taṃ vuttameva.
189 砍树这件事,和前面“被绑缚”那件事的处理方式相同。但这里有一个差别:如果有人被树压住,虽然还没死,也能从一侧把树砍断或把地挖开而脱身,手里也有刀或斧头,他也宁可舍弃性命,不可以去砍树或挖地。为什么?因为这样做就犯了巴吉帝亚,违犯了佛陀的教令,不算是在守护尽形寿的戒。所以,宁可舍弃性命,也要守住“不犯戒”这个原则,不可以那样做。不过,由别的比丘砍树或挖地把他救出来,是可以的。如果必须用臼车把树推转才能救出来,大苏摩长老说:“可以砍那棵树,取来臼。”玛哈巴杜玛长老说:“砍别的树取来用,也可以。”对于掉进坑洞等情况,绑梯子把人救上来,道理也一样。自己不可以砍伐草木来做梯子,别人做好后拿来救人,是可以的。巴利
189.Rukkhacchedanavatthu aṭṭabandhanavatthusadisaṃ. Ayaṃ pana viseso – yo rukkhena otthatopi na marati , sakkā ca hoti ekena passena rukkhaṃ chetvā pathaviṃ vā khanitvā nikkhamituṃ, hatthe cassa vāsi vā kuṭhārī vā atthi, tena api jīvitaṃ pariccajitabbaṃ, na ca rukkho vā chinditabbo, na pathavī vā khaṇitabbā. Kasmā? Evaṃ karonto hi pācittiyaṃ āpajjati, buddhassa āṇaṃ bhañjati, na jīvitapariyantaṃ sīlaṃ karoti. Tasmā api jīvitaṃ pariccajitabbaṃ, na ca sīlanti pariggahetvā na evaṃ kātabbaṃ. Aññassa pana bhikkhuno rukkhaṃ vā chinditvā pathaviṃ vā khanitvā taṃ nīharituṃ vaṭṭati. Sace udukkhalayantakena rukkhaṃ pavaṭṭetvā nīharitabbo hoti, taṃyeva rukkhaṃ chinditvā udukkhalaṃ gahetabbanti mahāsumatthero āha. Aññampi chinditvā gahetuṃ vaṭṭatīti mahāpadumatthero. Sobbhādīsu patitassāpi nisseṇiṃ bandhitvā uttāraṇe eseva nayo. Attanā bhūtagāmaṃ chinditvā nisseṇī na kātabbā, aññesaṃ katvā uddharituṃ vaṭṭatīti.
190 190. 在焚烧丛林这件事中——“焚烧丛林”是指在树林里放火。这里,按照指定和未指定两种情况,应当依照巴拉基格、无间罪、土喇咤亚、巴吉帝亚等罪各自对应的事相,来了知巴拉基格等不善业聚,方法和前面所说的一样。如果心里想“让青草、树木、灌木丛等烧掉”而放火,犯巴吉帝亚。如果心里想“让资具坏灭”而放火,犯恶作。即使只是出于嬉戏的意图,也犯恶作——这是《简要注》中说的。如果心里想“不管青的干的、有根的没根的,统统烧掉”而放火,就应当按事相分别了知巴拉基格、土喇咤亚、巴吉帝亚、恶作等罪。巴利
190. Dāyālimpanavatthūsu – dāyaṃ ālimpesunti vane aggiṃ adaṃsu. Ettha pana uddissānuddissavasena pārājikānantariyathullaccayapācittivatthūnaṃ anurūpato pārājikādīni akusalarāsibhāvo ca pubbe vuttanayeneva veditabbo. ‘‘Allatiṇavanappagumbādayo ḍayhantū’’ti ālimpentassa ca pācittiyaṃ. ‘‘Dabbūpakaraṇāni vinassantū’’ti ālimpentassa dukkaṭaṃ. Khiḍḍādhippāyenāpi dukkaṭanti saṅkhepaṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttaṃ. ‘‘Yaṃkiñci allasukkhaṃ saindriyānindriyaṃ ḍayhatū’’ti ālimpentassa vatthuvasena pārājikathullaccayapācittiyadukkaṭāni veditabbāni.
不过,世尊允许放逆火和做防火隔离。所以,在树林里看到樵夫放的火或自己烧起来的火蔓延过来时,如果心想“别让草屋被烧毁”,就可以对那火放逆火,让蔓延过来的火和逆火汇合到一起,因为没有燃料而熄灭。也可以做防护措施,比如在草屋周围铲掉地表草皮或挖沟,让烧过来的火得不到燃料而熄灭。这一切都只应该在火已经烧起来的时候做。如果火还没烧起来,就由未受具足戒的人以合乎戒律的方式来做。如果用水灭火,只能浇没有虫的水。巴利
Paṭaggidānaṃ pana parittakaraṇañca bhagavatā anuññātaṃ, tasmā araññe vanakammikehi vā dinnaṃ sayaṃ vā uṭṭhitaṃ aggiṃ āgacchantaṃ disvā ‘‘tiṇakuṭiyo mā vinassantū’’ti tassa aggino paṭiaggiṃ dātuṃ vaṭṭati, yena saddhiṃ āgacchanto aggi ekato hutvā nirupādāno nibbāti. Parittampi kātuṃ vaṭṭati tiṇakuṭikānaṃ samantā bhūmitacchanaṃ parikhākhaṇanaṃ vā, yathā āgato aggi upādānaṃ alabhitvā nibbāti. Etañca sabbaṃ uṭṭhiteyeva aggismiṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭati. Anuṭṭhite anupasampannehi kappiyavohārena kāretabbaṃ. Udakena pana nibbāpentehi appāṇakameva udakaṃ āsiñcitabbaṃ.
191 在“杀人处”这一节里:就像说“打一次”时那样,说“打两次”等说法时,也应当知道同样构成巴拉基格。若说“打两次”,即使只打一次就杀死了,因为已经落入所限定的范围内,仍然犯巴拉基格;但若打三次才杀死,就超出界限了。这样,在限定之内或在界限范围内,没有超出界限,仍然犯巴拉基格;一旦超出限定,一切情况都算超出界限,这时下命令的人无罪,责任只在杀者身上。就像打的数量一样,对人也是如此:若说“杀一个人”,只杀一人就犯巴拉基格,杀两人就超出界限。若说“杀两个人”,无论杀一人还是两人都犯巴拉基格,杀三人就超出界限——应当这样理解。比如有人在战场上用剑砍断了一个奔跑者的头,那无头的身躯还在跑,另一个人又打了他,使他倒下,问:谁犯巴拉基格?半数长老说:“是让那身躯停下来的人。”阿毗达摩论师瞿达多长老说:“是砍头的人。”像这一类事例,在说明这一条义理时也应当提到。巴利
191.Āghātanavatthusmiṃ – yathā ekappahāravacane; evaṃ ‘‘dvīhi pahārehī’’ti ādivacanesupi pārājikaṃ veditabbaṃ. ‘‘Dvīhī’’ti vutte ca ekena pahārena māritepi khettameva otiṇṇattā pārājikaṃ, tīhi mārite pana visaṅketaṃ. Iti yathāparicchede vā paricchedabbhantare vā avisaṅketaṃ, paricchedātikkame pana sabbattha visaṅketaṃ hoti, āṇāpako muccati, vadhakasseva doso. Yathā ca pahāresu; evaṃ purisesupi ‘‘eko māretū’’ti vutte ekeneva mārite pārājikaṃ, dvīhi mārite visaṅketaṃ. ‘‘Dve mārentū’’ti vutte ekena vā dvīhi vā mārite pārājikaṃ, tīhi mārite visaṅketanti veditabbaṃ. Eko saṅgāme vegena dhāvato purisassa sīsaṃ asinā chindati, asīsakaṃ kabandhaṃ dhāvati, tamañño paharitvā pātesi, kassa pārājikanti vutte upaḍḍhā therā ‘‘gamanūpacchedakassā’’ti āhaṃsu. Ābhidhammikagodattatthero ‘‘sīsacchedakassā’’ti. Evarūpānipi vatthūni imassa vatthussa atthadīpane vattabbānīti.
192 在酪浆这件事上:如果没有限定,只说“给他喝酪浆”,那么不管给他喝了哪种酪浆,只要人死了,就犯巴拉基格。如果作了限定,说“牛酪浆、水牛酪浆、山羊酪浆”,或者说“冷的、热的、熏过的、没熏过的”,那么给他喝所说的那种以外的酪浆,把人弄死了,就属于超出限定范围。巴利
192.Takkavatthusmiṃ – aniyametvā ‘‘takkaṃ pāyethā’’ti vutte yaṃ vā taṃ vā takkaṃ pāyetvā mārite pārājikaṃ. Niyametvā pana ‘‘gotakkaṃ mahiṃsatakkaṃ ajikātakka’’nti vā, ‘‘sītaṃ uṇhaṃ dhūpitaṃ adhūpita’’nti vā vutte yaṃ vuttaṃ, tato aññaṃ pāyetvā mārite visaṅketaṃ.
在盐醋药这件事上:所谓盐醋药,是一种用各种味道调配成的药。据说制作它的时候,把诃子、余甘子、毗醯勒的煎汁,各种谷物,各种蔬菜,七种谷物的饭,芭蕉果等各类果实,白藤、露兜树、枣椰笋等各类笋,鱼和肉块,以及多种蜂蜜、糖浆、岩盐、辛辣香料等药材放进去,涂封瓮口,放置一年、两年或三年,等它完全熟成后,颜色就像阎浮果汁一样。对于风病、咳嗽、麻风、黄疸、痔疮等病,以及吃了油腻食物之后,作为饭后饮料和帮助消化的药,没有别的药能比得上它。这种药,比丘在饭后也可以服用;生病的人可以照常饮用,没病的人则要掺水后当饮料喝。巴利
Loṇasovīrakavatthusmiṃ– loṇasovīrakaṃ nāma sabbarasābhisaṅkhataṃ ekaṃ bhesajjaṃ. Taṃ kira karontā harītakāmalakavibhītakakasāve sabbadhaññāni sabbaaparaṇṇāni sattannampi dhaññānaṃ odanaṃ kadaliphalādīni sabbaphalāni vettaketakakhajjūrikaḷīrādayo sabbakaḷīre macchamaṃsakhaṇḍāni anekāni ca madhuphāṇitasindhavaloṇanikaṭukādīni bhesajjāni pakkhipitvā kumbhimukhaṃ limpitvā ekaṃ vā dve vā tīṇi vā saṃvaccharāni ṭhapenti, taṃ paripaccitvā jamburasavaṇṇaṃ hoti. Vātakāsakuṭṭhapaṇḍubhagandarādīnaṃ siniddhabhojanaṃ bhuttānañca uttarapānaṃ bhattajīraṇakabhesajjaṃ tādisaṃ natthi. Taṃ panetaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ pacchābhattampi vaṭṭati, gilānānaṃ pākatikameva, agilānānaṃ pana udakasambhinnaṃ pānaparibhogenāti.
1 2 3 4